User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB...

246
User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1.5

Transcript of User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB...

Page 1: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

User’s ManualLIB 580*4.0.2

MS-Process*1.5

Page 2: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June
Page 3: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

Chapter Page

About this manual 1

Introduction 3

Instructions 9

Technical descriptions 27

Appendix 151

References 231

Index 233

Contents

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 4: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 5: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1

This is a user’s manual for LIB 580

Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Version: 4.0.2

Revision: 00

Issue date: June 1999

Data subject to change without notice

We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is issued and adifferent commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper use, in particular repro-duction and dissemination to third parties, is not permitted.

This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless detects anyerrors, he is asked to notify us as soon as possible.

The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the product description and isnot to be deemed to be a statement of guaranteed properties. In the interests of ourcustomers, we constantly seek to ensure that our products are developed to the latesttechnological standards.

As a result, it is possible that there may be some differences between the HW/SWproduct and this information product.

Author´s address:

ABB Automation Products AB

Substation Automation Division

Dept. TMD

SE-721 59 Västerås

Tel: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00

Fax: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18

Internet: http://www.abb.se/apr

© ABB Automation Products AB 1999

About this manual

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 6: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2 1MRK 511 064-UEN

About this manual

Page 7: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

3

The chapter "Introduction"

Preface.................................................................................................................7

Abbreviations, acronyms and definitions..............................................................7

Font conventions..................................................................................................9

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Introduction

Page 8: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

4 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Introduction

Page 9: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

5

Preface

1 Preface

Welcome to the LIB 580 User’s Manual. This manual will provide the user with thenecessary information to install, configure and modify library functions of the LIB 580package.

To be able to understand this manual the user should be familiar with MicroSCADAand the LIB 5xx application library concept.

The library is developed and manufactured byABB Automation Products AB, Västerås, Sweden.

!Note!Dialog boxes illustrated in this manual are to be considered as examples. This meansthat minor differences from the actual dialog boxes in the software can occur.

2 Abbreviations, acronyms and definitions

Attribute Used in the process database.

Base picture Base picture function from LIB 500.

Configurable feature An implemented feature that can be used or not accordingto the configuration in SCT.

Configuration attribute A configuration attribute defines the functionality of theinstalled library function.

Command Commands causes an action to be carried out when a menuitem or command button in a dialog box is clicked. Com-mands can also mean the commands executed byMicroSCADA as a result of a changed setting in a dialogbox.

Dimmed The way a dialog box element (button, check box etc.) aredisplayed when the command or setting they represent isunavailable.

Function instance When installing a library function the user installs functioninstances in the base picture.

IT Installation Tool. Used for library function installation.

Introduction

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 10: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

6 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Abbreviations, acronyms and definitions Introduction

Library function The common name for a function within the software pack-age containing functionality to be used for some purpose inthe process.

LIB 500 Base library package.

LIB 510 Medium voltage library package.

LIB 580 High voltage library package.

LON Local Operating Network.

LAG LON application guidelines.

LAN Local Area Network.

Main dialog The dialog box displayed when a function instance isclicked.

MicroSYS MicroSCADA base system.

MicroTool The SCIL engineering and system handling tool.

MicroNET Front-end used in MicroSCADA.

MicroSCADA Family name of the control and supervision system.

OPOT Optional Process Object Tool.

PCNet The communication software used in PCs for LON com-munication.

POT Process Object Tool.

Process picture Picture used at run-time presenting the process.

RT Representation Tool.

SCT Standard Configuration Tool.

SPA ASCII communication protocol.

SPANET SPA master based on MicroNET.

Tab Some dialog boxes has an index-card like selection ofpages, each displayed (selected) by clicking thetab.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.

Type function Container for code shared between several instances of thesame library function.

Unavailable command Commands that are not allowed to be executed at a certaintime areunavailable. In menus or in dialog boxes, theyappear dimmed.

Page 11: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

71MRK 511 064-UEN

Font conventions Introduction

3 Font conventions

Ordinary text is written like this.

Code samples, including keywords and variables within text and as separate para-graphs, and user-defined program elements within text are written inmonospacetext .

File names and paths are written inmonospace text .

Buttons and tabs in dialog boxes and menu commands are alwaysbold when refer-enced.

Configuration attributes are always CAPITALISED.

Page 12: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

8 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Font conventions Introduction

Page 13: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

9

The chapter "Instructions"

System requirements .........................................................................................13

Terminal end .................................................................................................13The MicroSCADA PC....................................................................................13

Installation ..........................................................................................................13

Installation of MicroSCADA software ............................................................14Installation of the LIB 580 product ................................................................14Readme file ...................................................................................................16

Creating and preparing an application ...............................................................16

Preparations..................................................................................................16Station type ...................................................................................................17Object identifier .............................................................................................17Installing and configuring ..............................................................................19

Installation tool (IT) ..................................................................................20Standard configuration tool (SCT) ...........................................................21Process object tool (POT)........................................................................22Representation tool (RT)..........................................................................23Optional process object tool (OPOT) .......................................................24

Performing certain operations ............................................................................26

Setting the way a dialog box closes..............................................................26Enabling user event creation on command execution ..................................26Setting the way values are displayed in function instances ..........................27Setting the way the object identifier is displayed in main dialog boxes.........27

Instructions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 14: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

10 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Instructions

Page 15: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

11

System requirements

1 System requirements

This section defines the requirements that must be fulfilled in order to ensure properinstallation and operation.

1.1 Terminal end

The remote SPA-bus communication or LON-bus communication option, which areused for process communication, must be installed in the terminal. The built-in con-nectors for SPA or LON are used. Make sure to include these when ordering the termi-nal.

1.2 The MicroSCADA PC

• Standard MicroSCADA PC requirements.

• Approximately 12 Mb disk space available for LIB 580 installation (all functionsincluded).

• MicroSYS revision 8.4.2 or later.

• MicroTOOL revision 8.4.2 or later.

• MicroNET revision 8.4.2 or later.

• PCNet revision 8.4.2 or later.

• LIB 500 revision 4.0.2 or later.

2 Installation

The LIB 580 library functions are designed to be as general as possible, making spe-cial design easy for the application engineer. For more details see the technicaldescription section for each function.

Installation is done in two steps:

1 Install the LIB 580 product

See “Installation of the LIB 580 product” on page 12.

2 Install one or more library functions

See “Creating and preparing an application” on page 14.

Instructions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 16: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

12 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation Instructions

!Note!MicroSCADA sessions are not allowed during installation.

2.1 Installation of MicroSCADA software

Before installation of LIB 580, the user must make sure that the MicroSYS, Micro-TOOL and LIB 500 software are already installed on the PC.

2.2 Installation of the LIB 580 product

1 Read the release notes

Open the Microsoft Word file Release_notes.doc.

2 Run L580_402.EXE from the CD

3 Select the software package

4 Click Start to install

The package will now be installed on the hard disk.

Page 17: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

131MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation Instructions

5 Execute any package specific instructions

Read and follow any package specific instruction in the Readme file. See “Readmefile” on page 14.

The LIB 580 functions are installed in the following directory structure:

Figure 1: Directory structure

LIB 580 files are located in the marked directories. These directories are mostly refer-enced by their logical path namesB_INST, B_USEandR_INST, R_USEandR_LANG. For more details see the appendix.

Also note the difference between the MicroSCADA directory delimiter “/”, and theWindows delimiter “\ ”.

Page 18: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

14 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

2.3 Readme file

The readme file (README.WRI)is installed in the directory[drive]:\SC\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS .

!Note!Always look in the readme file for the latest information. Specific release information,known errors and limitations are described there.

3 Creating and preparing an application

3.1 Preparations

The following preparations are necessary when creating a new application and prepar-ing it for use with LIB 580 library functions.

1 Setup the object identifier

SetupAPL:BSV15 in the file SYS_BASCON.COMfor theOI attribute in the Proc-ess database. See “Object identifier” on page 15

2 Consider and define the authorisation group

The setup is taken into account during standard function configuration. The author-isation group is defined in the User Management Tool. See MicroSCADA docu-mentation for details.Authorisationcanbe defined after the function has beeninstalled, butshouldbe defined earlier.

3 Define the naming conventions for process objects

4 Localise all signal texts

LIB 580 are delivered using english as the default language (LANG0).

5 Make sure that a base picture (LIB 500) is installed

A process picture cannot be used without an installed base picture.

The installed functions also demand that the process objects are created to work prop-erly in run-time mode.

Page 19: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

151MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.2 Station type

Station type defines the terminal communication protocol. Only LON (according toLAG 1.3) is supported.

3.3 Object identifier

Before installation the use of the object identifier attribute (OI ) must be defined. Theattribute string can be divided in up to five substrings or sub-identifiers depending onany user specific needs. Normally, the string is divided into three sub-identifiers; sta-tion, bay and device. The length of each substring is freely selectable but the totallength must always be exactly 30 characters.

!Note!It is of thegreatest importancethat the object identifier usage is defined before config-uration of the installed functions because the configuration process takes these valuesinto account when creating the process database.

The total length of theOI string must always be 30 characters.

Open the system configuration fileSYS_BASCON.COMand locate the following sec-tion:

; APPLICATIONS;The usage of OI & OX -attributes (required by LIB 500)@SV(15) = LIST(-

Process_Objects=LIST(-OI=LIST(-

Title1=VECTOR("Substation"),-Title2=VECTOR("Bay"),-Title3=VECTOR("Device"),-Title4=VECTOR(""),-Title5=VECTOR(""),-Length1=10,-Length2=15,-Length3=5,-Length4=0,-Length5=0,-

Field1=VECTOR("STA"),-Field2=VECTOR("BAY"),-Field3=VECTOR("DEV"),-Field4=VECTOR(""),-Field5=VECTOR("")),-

OX=LIST(-Title1=VECTOR("Object text"),-Length1=30)))

Page 20: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

16 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

TheTitle n parameters defines the title sub-identifier,Length n the length sub-iden-tifier andField n the acronym sub-identifier. In the preceding example file, the sec-ond sub-identifier (Title2 ) is “Bay”, its length (Length2 ) is 15 characters, and theacronym (Field2 ) is “BAY”. The sum of the three usedLength n parameters is10+15+5, which equals 30 characters.

In the following example, an additional sub-identifier, three characters long, is addedto reflect the station voltage level. The definition in the fileSYS_BASCON.COMshould look like this:

@SV(15) = LIST(-Process_Objects=LIST(-

OI=LIST(-Title1=VECTOR("Substation"),-Title2=VECTOR("Voltage Level"),-Title3=VECTOR("Bay"),-Title4=VECTOR("Device"),-Title5=VECTOR(""),-Length1=10,-Length2=3,-Length3=12,-Length4=5,-Length5=0,-Field1=VECTOR("STA"),-Field2=VECTOR(""),-Field3=VECTOR("BAY"),-Field4=VECTOR("DEV"),-Field5=VECTOR("")),-

OX=LIST(-Title1=VECTOR("Object text"),-Length1=30)))

!Note!If Length n is not set, the default values from the base function configuration file isused, defining the length of the three normally used sub-identifiers (station, bay anddevice) asLength1 =2, Length2 =14 andLength3 =14. This may cause unex-pected behaviour at run-time, especially in the case where medium voltage and highvoltage functions are installed in the same station picture.

Page 21: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

171MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.4 Installing and configuring

When the LIB 580 product has been installed, the library functions are available foruse. To use a library function i.e. to add a library function to the base picture, it needsto beinstalledand thenconfigured. For these purposes the following tools are used:

• Installation tool (IT)

• Standard configuration tool (SCT)

• Process object tool (POT)

• Representation tool (RT)

• Optional process object tool (OPOT)

All tools are briefly described in the following sections. During installation the libraryfunction instance must be named and positioned in the base picture. The naming con-ventions described on page 33 should be followed.

All configurable attributes has default values normally making any specific changesunnecessary. However, these default values can be changed at any time during installa-tion and configuration.

First use the Installation tool to install library functions and to place the functioninstances in the base picture. Then use the Standard configuration tool to adjust config-urable parameters and to create process objects by running the Process object toolfrom SCT.

Figure 2: Process of the installation and configuration

Libraryfunction

Configura-tion file

Picture with installed stan-dard function inSC/APL/PICT directory

Installa-tion pro-cess usingIT

Processobject

Configura-tion pro-cess usingSCT

Page 22: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

18 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.4.1 Installation tool (IT)

Use the Installation tool to install LIB 580 library functions in the base picture.

1 Select a function instance and open the picture editor

2 On the Edit menu, click Select Pictures Functions

A quicker way is to click thePicture functions button in the toolbar.

3 Click the Installation tool button

The Installation tool dialog box is displayed.

4 Locate the library function to install

All library functions are located in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\LIB 580\Process . Double-click the folder icons in thedirectory display to open.

5 Install the library function

Choose the desired library function, enter a suitable function name and clickInstall . Position the function instance anywhere in the base picture.

All library functions (except bay and station functions) can be installed using one ofthree function instance sizes:

• Small symbol

• Medium symbol

• Large symbol

For more information, please see the technical description for each function.

As a result of the library function installation thefunction instance(graphical symbol)and thetype function(visible on the bottom row of the base picture in the picture editormode) are installed. There will be only one type function for each library function,regardless of the number of function instances.

For more information about the installation tool, see“Installing standard functions”inthe MicroSCADA manual“Picture editing” .

Page 23: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

191MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

!Note!It is not recommended to mix medium sized picture instances together with small orlarge sized picture instances of the same library function in one picture. The differencein size can result in picture misalignment.

3.4.2 Standard configuration tool (SCT)

After installing the library function in the base picture, the function instance needs tobe configured. Use SCT to set and select attributes, select a suitable representationsymbol, and create the process objects. SCT attributes are described in the appendix.

1 Select a function instance to configure

2 Click the Standard configuration tool button

The standard configuration tool is started.

3 Configure the function instance

Make sure theConfiguration tab is displayed. If not, click theConfiguration tab.

It is important to set attributes in the order of appearance since changing oneattribute may affect the default values of other attributes.

For more information about the standard configuration tool see“Configuration of pic-ture functions”in the MicroSCADA manual“Picture editing” .

!Note!Configuration details for each library function can be found in the technical descrip-tions.

Page 24: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

20 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.4.3 Process object tool (POT)

This tool is used for creating all necessary objects in the process database. POT is una-vailable if no process objects are needed. POT can be run from SCT. The tool automat-ically suggests which process objects are required.

1 Select a function instance to configure

2 Click the Standard configuration tool button

The standard configuration tool is started.

3 Click the Tools tab

4 On the Tools list, select Process object tool

5 Click Open

6 Click Create All

Normally you should create all process objects.

7 Click Cancel to close the dialog box

For more information see“Connect a picture function to existing process objects”inthe MicroSCADA manual“Picture editing” .

!Note!Configuration details for each library function can be found in the technical descrip-tions.

Page 25: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

211MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.4.4 Representation tool (RT)

Some library functions can be represented by user selectable symbol families, in orderto conform with company or international standard. Use the Representation tool toselect a suitable function instance symbol to represent the function.The Representationtool can be run from SCT.

Fig. 3 The representation tool

1 Select a function instance to configure

2 Click the Standard configuration tool button

The standard configuration tool is started.

3 Click the Tools tab

4 On the Tools list, select Representation tool

Select a suitable symbol from theRepresentationslist.

5 Click OK to use the representation symbol

The dialog box is closed.

!Note!Configuration details for each library function can be found in the technical descrip-tions.

Page 26: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

22 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

3.4.5 Optional process object tool (OPOT)

Some library functions require additional process objects. As an example, a switchdevice needs several optional process objects in order to control the varying function-ality different kinds of devices have. Use OPOT to add these optional process objects.

In contrast to IT, SCT and RT, which all are MicroSCADA tools, OPOT is a part of theLIB 580 package.

Figure 4: The Optional process object tool dialog box

At top, the logical name of the function instance is displayed (1).Use the check boxesin theSelected:column (2) to select the process objects affected when clicking any ofthe command buttons.

Table 1: OPOT dialog box functions

Buttons Functionality

“Selected”check boxes

Check box column used to select process objects for fur-ther processing. When selected, the process object can becreated or deleted by clicking the corresponding buttons

1

2

Page 27: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

231MRK 511 064-UEN

Creating and preparing an application Instructions

Fig. 5 New process object value dialog box

1 Select a function instance to configure

2 Click the Standard configuration tool button

The standard configuration tool is started.

3 Click the Tools tab

4 In the Tools list, select Optional process object tool

5 Click Open

The Optional process object tool dialog box is displayed.

6 Click Select All

Normally you should create all optional process objects.

“Defined”check boxes

When selected the process object exists in the processdatabase.

Edit Open the Process Object Editor. Available only if the proc-ess object exists in the process database.

Select all Select all process objects.

Unselect all Cancel the selection of all process objects.

Create Create the selected process objects. The Defined checkboxes will be updated correspondingly.

New object Display the New Process Object Value dialog box. Thisdialog box allows to create a new process object.

Delete object Delete the selected process object(s). The Defined checkboxes will be updated correspondingly.

Refresh Refresh the dialog box.

Cancel Close the OPOT dialog box.

Table 1: OPOT dialog box functions

Buttons Functionality

Page 28: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

24 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Performing certain operations Instructions

7 Click Create

The process objects are created in the process database.

8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box

!Note!Configuration details for each library function can be found in the technical descrip-tions

4 Performing certain operations

4.1 Setting the way a dialog box closes

1 Open the Tools dialog box

On theOptions menu of the picture editor, clickSettings.

2 Open the Process control dialog box

On theTools menu, clickProcess Control.

3 Select the appropriate closing options

4 Click Ok

Close the dialog box and save the changes.

4.2 Enabling user event creation on command execution

1 Open the Tools dialog box

On theOptions menu of the process picture, clickSettings.

2 Open the Process control dialog box

On theTools menu, clickProcess Control.

3 Enable the user event creation alternative

4 Click Ok

Close the dialog box and save the changes.

Page 29: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

251MRK 511 064-UEN

Performing certain operations Instructions

4.3 Setting the way values are displayed in function instances

1 Open the Show Measurements dialog box

On theStationsmenu of the process picture, point toShow Measurement.

2 Click the appropriate alternative

One of the following:

3 Click Close

Enable the selected display method, close the dialog box and save the changes.

4.4 Setting the way the object identifier is displayed in main dialogboxes

1 Display the Settings dialog box

On theOption menu, clickSettings.

2 Display the Show object ID dialog box

On theTools menu, clickShow object ID.

3 Select the appropriate identifiers to display

Up to five sub-identifiers can be selected by choosing the corresponding optionbutton. The sub-identifier labels displayed depends on the setup of the OI attribute,see “Object identifier” on page 15. The normally available sub-identifiers areSta-tion, Bay or Device.

4 Click Ok

Enable the selected display method, close the dialog box and save the changes.

All Show all available measurements of the function instance. If notconfigured for measurement display, bars are used.

Predefined Show measurements according to configuration (value or bar).

None Hide measurements.

Page 30: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

26 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Performing certain operations Instructions

Page 31: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

27

The chapter "Technical descriptions"

Common functionality ..........................................................................................33

General ..............................................................................................................33

Naming conventions .....................................................................................33Color coding..................................................................................................33Process objects used for color presentation .................................................34Function instance vs. type function...............................................................34

Dialog boxes ......................................................................................................35

Object identifier .............................................................................................36Unavailable commands.................................................................................37Dialog box handling after execution..............................................................37User ID event on command execution..........................................................37Preselection dialog box.................................................................................37Control confirmation ......................................................................................38The More button menu..................................................................................40Monitor interlocking.......................................................................................41Measurement presentation ...........................................................................41

Common dialog boxes .......................................................................................41

Alarm state....................................................................................................41Blockings.......................................................................................................42

Internal blockings .....................................................................................44Active object messages ................................................................................45

Station ....................................................................................................................47

Introduction ........................................................................................................47

Installation and configuration .............................................................................48

Installation.....................................................................................................48Configuration.................................................................................................49

Configuration with SCT ............................................................................50Configuration with POT............................................................................50

Object presentation.......................................................................................53

Tutorial ...............................................................................................................53

The main dialog box......................................................................................53Unavailable commands............................................................................54

Control confirmation ......................................................................................55Additional functionality ..................................................................................55

Database update dialog box ....................................................................55

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 32: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

28 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Technical descriptions

Bay..........................................................................................................................57

Introduction ........................................................................................................57

Installation and configuration .............................................................................58

Installation .....................................................................................................58Configuration.................................................................................................59

Configuration with SCT ............................................................................59Configuration with POT............................................................................59Configuration with OPOT .........................................................................63

Object presentation .......................................................................................63

Tutorial ...............................................................................................................64

The main dialog box......................................................................................64Unavailable commands............................................................................65

Control confirmation ......................................................................................65Additional functionality ..................................................................................65

External bay blockings dialog box............................................................66Auto reclosure dialog box ........................................................................67Disturbance recorder dialog box ..............................................................68Event list dialog box .................................................................................69

Switch device.........................................................................................................71

Introduction ........................................................................................................71

Installation and configuration .............................................................................72

Installation .....................................................................................................72Configuration.................................................................................................73

Configuration with SCT ............................................................................74Configuration with RT ..............................................................................75Representations.......................................................................................78Configuration with POT............................................................................79Configuration with OPOT .........................................................................82

Tutorial ...............................................................................................................83

The main dialog box......................................................................................83Control confirmation ......................................................................................84Auxiliary plug.................................................................................................84Additional functionality ..................................................................................85

Operation countings dialog box ...............................................................85Counter settings dialog box .....................................................................86External blockings dialog box ..................................................................88Forced operation dialog box ....................................................................88Substitute position dialog box ..................................................................90Position simulation dialog box..................................................................91

Page 33: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

291MRK 511 064-UEN

Technical descriptions

Measurement function..........................................................................................93

Introduction ........................................................................................................93

Installation and configuration .............................................................................94

Installation.....................................................................................................94Configuration.................................................................................................95

Configuration with SCT ............................................................................95Configuration with RT ..............................................................................96Configuration with POT............................................................................97

Object presentation.......................................................................................98

Tutorial ...............................................................................................................99

The main dialog box......................................................................................99Unavailable commands..........................................................................101

Additional functionality ................................................................................101Edit limits dialog box ..............................................................................102Zero deadband setting dialog box..........................................................102Fast trending ..........................................................................................103Fast trending settings dialog box ...........................................................106

Phase displacement............................................................................................109

Introduction ......................................................................................................109

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................109

Installation...................................................................................................109Configuration...............................................................................................110

Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................110Configuration with POT..........................................................................110

Tutorial .............................................................................................................110

REx 5xx supervision ...........................................................................................111

Introduction ......................................................................................................111

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................112

Installation...................................................................................................112Configuration...............................................................................................112

Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................113Configuration with RT ............................................................................113Configuration with POT..........................................................................114

Object presentation.....................................................................................114

Page 34: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

30 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Technical descriptions

Tutorial .............................................................................................................114

The main dialog box....................................................................................114Additional functionality ................................................................................115

Signal state dialog box...........................................................................115Device information dialog box................................................................117

Transformer voltage control ..............................................................................119

Introduction ......................................................................................................119

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................120

Installation ...................................................................................................120Configuration...............................................................................................121

Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................121Configuration with RT ............................................................................122Configuration with POT..........................................................................123Configuration with OPOT .......................................................................125

Tutorial .............................................................................................................126

The main dialog box....................................................................................126Unavailable commands..........................................................................127

Control confirmation ....................................................................................128Additional functionality ................................................................................128

Change characteristic dialog box...........................................................129Activate simulation dialog box................................................................130Set reference voltage dialog box ...........................................................131Target position dialog box......................................................................132

Coil tap changer ..................................................................................................133

Introduction ......................................................................................................133

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................134

Installation ...................................................................................................134Configuration...............................................................................................135

Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................136Configuration with RT ............................................................................137Configuration with POT..........................................................................137Configuration with OPOT .......................................................................139

Tutorial .............................................................................................................139

The main dialog box....................................................................................139Control confirmation ....................................................................................140Additional functionality ................................................................................141

Target position in steps dialog box ........................................................141Target position in per cent dialog box ....................................................142

Page 35: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

311MRK 511 064-UEN

Technical descriptions

Bay overview .......................................................................................................143

Introduction ......................................................................................................143

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................143

Installation...................................................................................................144Configuration...............................................................................................144

Preparations...........................................................................................144Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................144Configuration with RT ............................................................................145Connected process objects....................................................................145

Object presentation.....................................................................................146

Alarm indicator ....................................................................................................147

Installation and configuration ...........................................................................147

Installation...................................................................................................147Configuration...............................................................................................147

Configuration with SCT ..........................................................................148Configuration with RT ............................................................................149

Object presentation.....................................................................................149Installation example ....................................................................................150

Page 36: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

32 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Technical descriptions

Page 37: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

33

General

Common functionality

Common functionality

1 General

1.1 Naming conventions

To achieve conformity in the way a system is described, naming conventions should beset up. The following example shows one way to use consistent and proper naming.The station name is Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown (For moredetails about naming conventions see the MicroSCADA manuals):

1.2 Color coding

The color coding is applied generally through the whole library and the correspondingprocess objects and function instances. Colors are always displayed in priority order asgiven in the following table.

Table 1: Naming conventions

Name Meaning

GRB Station

GRBHA12BAY Bay

GRBHA12Q0 Circuit breaker Q0

GRBHA12Q1 Truck Q1

GRBHA12Q9 Earth switch Q9

GRBHA12CT Measurements/current transformer

GRBHA12VT Measurements/voltage transformer

GRBHA12ALA Alarm indicator

GRBHA12LS1 Line segment 1 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LS2 Line segment 2 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LS3 Line segment 3 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LI Line indicator of busbar coloring

Table 2: Color coding

Color Description Priority

WHITE flashing Object is under command, only for command with an longoperation time (CTC, TRA, SWD)

Highest

WHITE Selected on Monitor (Main dialog box open)

MAGENTA Not sampled (OS=10)(symbol “?”)

MAGENTA Not updated (OS=2,4...9) last known value

CYAN Substituted (SB=1)

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 38: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

34 1MRK 511 064-UEN

General

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

1.3 Process objects used for color presentation

All process objects influence the color of the representation symbol, except the socalledcommand responseprocess objects (index 170-199), the internal process objects(index 100-120) and the optional process objects.

All relevant process objects must be connected to the process with an Unit Number(UN), an Object Address (OA) and a proper switch state (SS=Auto ). See the technicaldescription for each library function for more details on what indices are used.

1.4 Function instance vs. type function

When installing a library function, two graphical symbols are displayed in the basepicture; thefunction instanceand thetype function.

The function instance is a graphical representation of the installed library function. Ifthe library function is installed more than once, for example if several bays need to becontrolled or monitored, several function instances, one for each bay, will be displayedin the base picture.

The type function is only installed once. The type function is a placeholder for com-mon program code used by all installed function instances. This way memory is usedmore efficient and changes in common program code are made in one single programfile.

MAGENTA Invalid value (OS=1, means indication is invalid)

MAGENTA Update blocked (UB=1 or BL=1), indication

RED flashing Alarm unacknowledged AR=0

RED Alarm acknowledge AR=1 and AL=1

CYAN Manually entered no process connection (SS<2 or UN=0)

BROWN Control blocked for Commands UB=1 or external com-mand blocked indication=1

YELLOW Warning only for measurement for other indications Alarmblocked (AB=1 and AC>0)History blocked (HB=1)

Printout blocked (PB=1)

Reprocessing blocked (XB=1)

GREEN Not Synchronized, OS = 3

GREEN Normal Lowest

Table 2: Color coding

Color Description Priority

Page 39: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

351MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

2 Dialog boxes

When a function instance is clicked, the function’smain dialog boxwill be displayed.Other dialog boxes may be displayed when commands are chosen, options are set orbuttons are clicked.

Clicking a second function instance while a main dialog box is displayed is the sameas clicking theClosebutton in the displayed main dialog box, meaning that the dis-played dialog box is closed and any made changes will be lost.

Figure 1: Example of a dialog box

The labels displayed in dialog boxes are stored in text files and can be translated viathe translation tool.

Specific information about library function dialog boxes are found in the technicaldescriptions.

Table 3: A dialog box contents

Description

1 Title bar. On this bar the dialog box title is shown. Click and hold to move thedialog box to any position on the display.

2 Object identifier from the OI attribute, depending on the setting inSYS_BASCON.COMfile, see “Object identifier” on page 36. The symbol label (ifpresent) is shown in parenthesis.

1

2

4 6

3

5

7

Page 40: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

36 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

Some dialog boxes are using an index-card like selection of pages, like the adjacentexample, taken from the Measurement main dialog box. By clicking the tab labelledIL1 , P andQ, the options or values concerning that particular subfunction is dis-played. Also note the dimmed tabMeas.4, illustrating an unavailable tab, i.e. a tab thatcontains values or settings that cannot be used or displayed in this particular configura-tion.

Figure 2: Tabs example

2.1 Object identifier

The object identifier can be configured to display a part of or the whole identifier. See“Setting the way the object identifier is displayed in main dialog boxes” on page 25 forinstructions.

3 Function specific contents. Here command buttons, option buttons, text boxesand more, specific for each library function are displayed. The possible actionsdepend on the function.

4 More button. Menu button that displays a cascading menu containing severalcommands, some specific for the library function.

5 Close button. Command button that closes the dialog box.

6 Help button. Command button that displays the online help for the specific dia-log box.The online help system is optionally installed.

7 Info bar. On this bar the status message with highest priority is displayed. Whenthe bar is clicked, the message is erased.

Table 3: A dialog box contents

Description

Page 41: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

371MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

2.2 Unavailable commands

Commands that are not allowed to be executed at a certain time areunavailable. Inmenus or in dialog boxes, they appeardimmed.

The button label inherits a grey color and the button will not react when clicked. Thereason why the command is unavailable is usually displayed in the dialog box info bar.Some of the reasons can be:

• The control centre does not have the authority to control this substation.

• The operator does not have the authority to perform the operation.

• Discrepancy in database configuration; not all objects are connected to the process.

• Control has been blocked.

• The station is in local control.

• Communication with the process unit is lost.

2.3 Dialog box handling after execution

Dialog boxes that are displayed without user action will automatically close after atimeout period set in the MicroSCADA system.

Dialog boxes can be set to remain open after command execution, or to be closed whenthe command is executed without errors. The way a dialog box closes (automatic ormanual) is configured in theProcess controldialog box. See “Setting the way a dialogbox closes” on page 24 for instructions.

If errors are detected during command execution the dialog box will remain open andan error message will be displayed in the dialog box’s info bar and the buttons in thedialog box will be dimmed, except for theHelp andClosebuttons.

2.4 User ID event on command execution

An event can be recorded after a successful command execution with the syntax:

<Time>, <System name>, <Monitor number>, <User logg-in name>,<Performed operation>

See “Enabling user event creation on command execution” on page 24 for instructions.

2.5 Preselection dialog box

Since several dialog boxes not only sets the state of objects in the process database butalso execute commands in the MicroSCADA, the need of separating the selection orsetting of the command parameters before sending the command to MicroSCADA isapparent. This is done by using apreselection dialog box.

Page 42: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

38 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

When the dialog box is displayed at first theOK button is unavailable. Clicking theClosebutton closes the dialog box. Since no preselection has been made, no com-mands are executed.

Figure 3: Preselection dialog box

In the preceding example option buttons are used to switch between the mutuallyexclusive alternativesIn use andOut of use. When the function option is changed byclicking an option button, a command selection is made. TheOK button becomesavailable and theClosebutton will change to aCancelbutton.

Clicking theOK button will cause the selected command to be executed. In the pre-ceding example a command that enables the automatic reclosing function is executedin the MicroSCADA. Clicking theCancelbutton will discard made settings and closethe dialog box. Examples of preselection dialog boxes are:

• Internal Blocking (all functions).

• External Blocking (all functions).

• Auto reclosure (Bay function).

• Change Settings (Voltage control function).

The dialog box will close after a successful command execution. Errors related to theMicroSCADA command execution will be displayed in the dialog box’s info bar.

2.6 Control confirmation

Directly executed MicroSCADA commands do not need any preselection of options inorder to be executed. A control confirmation dialog box is displayed to make it possi-ble to cancel the command execution.

Page 43: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

391MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

The following figure shows the control confirmation dialog box which is displayedafter selecting an operator place in the bay control dialog box.

Figure 4: Control confirmation dialog box

The operation or command to be carried out is described in the dialog box for verifica-tion. The dialog box is closed when a button is clicked. The dialog box buttons havethe following functions:

!Note!If the operator place is changed while a control confirmation dialog box is displayed,the dialog box will be closed and a message is displayed in the main dialog box’s infobar.

Table 4: Control confirmation dialog box

Description

1 Executes the command. In case of simulated process thechange in the database is simulated.

2 The command is cancelled.

1 2

Page 44: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

40 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

2.7 The More button menu

By clicking theMore button a menu is displayed.

Figure 5: Clicking the More button (example)

The menu commands will differ between library functions. However some commonmenu commands exist.

The commands available in all library functions are described in the section “Commondialog boxes” on page 41.

Table 5: Menu commands

Command Available in

Alarm state All library functions

Blockings All library functions

Object messages All library functions

Update Process Data Station library function

Auto reclosure Bay library function

Disturb. recorder Bay library function

Event list Bay library function

Forced operation Switch device library function

Substitute Switch device library function

Operation countings Switch device library function, circuit breaker only

Simulation Switch device library function

Edit limits Measurement library function

Zero deadband Measurement library function

Fast trending Measurement library function

Signal state REx 5xx supervision library function

Device information REx 5xx supervision library function

Page 45: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

411MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

2.8 Monitor interlocking

If the main dialog box of a library function is displayed from more than one stationpicture or monitor, control will be allowed only in the first (primary) displayed dialogbox. Other (secondary) dialog boxes will be displayed with all dialog box elementsunavailable. The message “Selected on another monitor” will be displayed in the infobar of the secondary dialog boxes.

When the primary dialog box is closed, either by command execution or by closing/cancelling, control is transferred to the top displayed secondary dialog box, making alldialog box elements available and removing the message in the info bar.

2.9 Measurement presentation

The way measurements are displayed in measurement and coil tap changer functioninstances can be changed during run-time. See “Setting the way values are displayed infunction instances” on page 25 for instructions.

3 Common dialog boxes

In this section dialog boxes common to all library functions are described. Click theMore button to display the menu. Dialog boxes available only in a certain library func-tion are explained in the specific function’s technical description.

3.1 Alarm state

Use theAlarm state dialog box to view all registered alarms for the selected function.

Figure 6: Alarm state dialog box, no alarms

Page 46: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

42 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

Select an object from the drop-down list to display the associated alarms in the textbox below. The alarm list is sorted chronologically starting with the newest alarm. Fordetails please refer to the MicroSCADA Lib 500 Alarm List. Acknowledge by select-ing one or more listed alarms and clickAcknowledge Alarm.

Figure 7: Alarming objects

3.2 Blockings

Blockings can be set for:

• a station (for the whole station, which means all devices having the same stationname).

• a bay (for all devices connected to the bay).

• a specific function (such as a switch device).

Table 6: Alarm state dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

AcknowledgeAlarm

Authorizationlevel 1 or above

Sets the alarm receipt status to acknowledged.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays the on-line help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 47: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

431MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

Blocking can be internal or external. Functions can be configured via SCT for internaland/or external blocking.

Signals from the process can be blocked for six different purposes:

!Note!External blocking details for each library function can be found in the technicaldescriptions.

Table 7: Blocking functionality

Blocking type Functionality

Internal blocking only Blocking update, control, alarm, event, printout andreprocessing are performed in the MicroSCADAdatabase.

External blocking only Update and control are performed in the controlunit. Blocking alarm, event, printout and reprocess-ing are not available.

Internal and external blocking Update and control are performed in the controlunit. Alarm, event, printout and reprocessing block-ings are performed in the MicroSCADA database.

Table 8: Blocking purpose

Blocking Purpose

Event blocking Event registration is not done. The events are notshown in the event list.

Alarm blocking Alarms are not activated, regardless of the objectstate.

Printout blocking Events are not sent to the printer.

Update blocking The indications are not updated from the process.

Control blocking Operation commands are not sent to the process.

Reprocessing Event channel activation is blocked, e.g. eventdriven execution of tasks will not be performed.

Page 48: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

44 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

3.2.1 Internal blockings

This type of blocking is done by setting of the corresponding object attribute in theprocess database:

• HB(event block)

• AB (alarm block)

• PB (printout block)

• UB(update block)

• XB (reprocessing block)

The OI attribute is used as the condition for blocking. If for example a bay is blocked,all process objects defined with the same bay name in their OI attribute definition willbe blocked. This is a preselection command dialog box as described in “Preselectiondialog box” on page 37.

!Note!It is very important to configure the OI attribute correctly in order to make the block-ing function work properly.

.

Figure 8: Internal blocking (example)

Page 49: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

451MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

!Note!This dialog box is not movable.

3.3 Active object messages

Even a medium complex system can generate a large amount of error and warningmessages normally displayed in the info bar of several main dialog boxes making thetask to monitor and overview difficult.

Use theActive object messagesdialog box to overview all messages occurring at acertain moment in time. The dialog box lists all current messages in priority order.

Create a new “snapshot” by pressing theRefreshbutton. If there are more messagesthan what will fit into the list view, scroll the list using the scrollbar. Close the dialogbox by clickingOK .

Table 9: Internal blockings dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Option buttons Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Command preselection of blocking condition(block/deblock). When the dialog box is dis-played at first, the buttons are set to indicatethe current blocking state of the switch device.

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Executes blocking/deblocking commands asset by the command preselection.

Cancel/Close - Cancels the command and/or closes the dialogbox.

Help - Displays the on-line help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 50: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

46 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Common dialog boxes

Common functionality

Technical descriptions

The messages are built out of two parts, the Object text, that is, theOXattribute of theconcerned process object and an additional part which is added according to thechecked database attribute. The additional text part is read from theRPU_PROMSG.TXTfile. Messages shown in this dialog box are stored in the fileR_LANG/RPU_PROMSG.TXT

Figure 9: Active object messages dialog box

Messages common to all library functions are listed in the appendix.

Table 10: Active object message dialog box functions

Button Functionality

Refresh Takes a “snapshot” of the current object state.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Help Displays the online help for this specific dialog box.

Page 51: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

47

Introduction

Station

Station

Use the Station library function to control and monitor station related functions.Thefunction instance displays the position of the Station/Remote switch. Function status isindicated by the instance color. In addition to the color coding a status message is dis-played in the main dialog box’s info bar.

Figure 1: The Station function instance

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Station/Remote switch indication.

• Station/Remote switch operation (Local, Station, Remote, Station and Remote).

• Color coded object status display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment for all alarms within a substation.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• Object messages list display.

• Database update facility for the entire substation (general interrogation).

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

Every substation must have a corresponding Station library function installed, since itis used for defining the substation’s control authority level. If the same substation ispresent in several process pictures (Overview, HV-busbar, MV-busbar, Protection etc.)the Station library function should be installed only in one of these pictures.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 52: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

48 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Station

Technical descriptions

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Station library function requires that the base picture is installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

When installing, select a visible or invisible installation. A visible installation meansthat the function is installed using an 80x40 pixels large function instance. An invisibleinstallation means that the function is installed without function instance, instead thestate of the Station/Remote switch is displayed in the header bar instead of theDay/weektext box.

Figure 2: Typical installation, (1) visible, (2) invisible

1

2

Page 53: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

491MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Station

Technical descriptions

The following options can be chosen during installation:

• Station/Remote can be set to Local then the operation is blocked.

• Station/Remote function visible/invisible.

• Station/Remote switch operable as a hardware or a software switch.

• Station and Remote operation possible at the same time.

• Use internal blocking.

• Data update facility for entire substation (general interrogation).

• Include help dialog boxes.

Default settings:

• Application Setting: System location (SCS).

• MicroSCADA is used as Substation Control System.

Due to the limitation of theStation Authority dialog box (Control authority of Net-work Control Centers), it is not recommended to install more than one station libraryfunction in one process picture. However, if there are more than one station picturefunction in the same process picture, the station authority will only recognize the latestinstalled.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

Page 54: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

50 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Station

Technical descriptions

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 3: SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

Table 1: Common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

10 Station/Remote switch indi-cation.

101 Selected on another moni-tor.

Page 55: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

511MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Station

Technical descriptions

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration.

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute name Selection Index (IX) Description

STATION_SR_IN_USE Yes 70 Command to set operatorplace to Local

170 Action/actterm commandresponse

71 Command to set operatorplace to Station

171 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

72 Command to set operatorplace to Remote

172 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

No No objects created

Page 56: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

52 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Station

Technical descriptions

STATION_SR_IN_USE

MULTIPLE_OPERATOR_PLACE

Yes 70 Command to set operatorplace to Local

170 Action/actterm commandresponse

71 Command to set operatorplace to Station

171 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

72 Command to set operatorplace to Remote

172 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

73 Command to set operatorplace to Station and Remote

173 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

No 70 Command to set operatorplace to Local

170 Action/actterm commandresponse

71 Command to set operatorplace to Station

171 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

72 Command to set operatorplace to Remote

172 Actcon/actterm commandresponse

BLOCKING_METHOD Yes 100 Station Internal blocking

No No objects created

GENERAL_INTERROGATION_IN_USE

Yes 30 Start of general interrogation

31 End of general interrogation

No No objects created

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute name Selection Index (IX) Description

Page 57: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

531MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Station

Technical descriptions

2.3 Object presentation

The current Station/Remote switch position is indicated by the function instance text.The function status is indicated by the function instance color.

!Note!The process objects general interrogation start and end (IX 30 and 31) are not con-nected to the representation of the Station/Remote switch.

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use theStation Control dialog box to monitor and control the Station/Remote switchand to access subfunctions.

Figure 4: Station control main dialog box

Page 58: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

54 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Station

Technical descriptions

3.1.1 Unavailable commands

In addition to the reasons described in “Unavailable commands” on page 37, the radiobuttons for selection of the station/remote switch setting will be replaced by unavaila-ble check boxes when the Station/Remote switch is not remotely controllable byMicroSCADA. The state of a hardware or software switch comes from an externalcontrol device and shows the current operator place.

Figure 5: Check box replacement

Table 3: Main dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Local Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Local.

Station Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Station.

Remote Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Remote.

Station and Remote Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Station andRemote.

More - Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close - Closes the main dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 59: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

551MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Station

Technical descriptions

3.2 Control confirmation

Changing the station/remote switch requires control confirmation as described in“Control confirmation” on page 38.

Figure 6: The Station control function control confirmation dialog box

3.3 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

3.3.1 Database update dialog box

Use theDatabase updatedialog box to initialize the substation after system restart orto verify database consistency.

Figure 7: Database update dialog box

Table 4: Database update dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Starts the general interrogation for the whole sta-tion and closes the dialog box.

Cancel - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays the online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 60: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

56 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Station

Technical descriptions

This function starts a general interrogation of all connected control units. The task isexecuted as a background process which allows the system to be used during theupdate. The duration depends on the amount of data to be updated, the speed of com-munication links and the communication protocol.

Error messages will be displayed in the MicroSCADA notification window.

Figure 8: The MicroSCADA notification window

Page 61: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

57

Introduction

Bay

Bay

Use the bay library function to control and monitor of the bay related functions. Thefunction instances displays the position of the Station/Remote switch. Function statusis indicated by the instance color. In addition to the color coding a status message isdisplayed in the main dialog box’s info bar.

Figure 1: The Bay function instance

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Station/Remote switch indication.

• Station/Remote switch operation (Local, Station, Remote, Station and Remote).

• Color coded object status display.

• Bay automatic reclosing control.

• Disturbance recorder control.

• Alarm list display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment for all alarms within a bay.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• External blocking (signal, command, measurement).

• Event list display.

• Object messages list display.

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 62: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

58 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

The following options can be chosen during installation:

• Include automatic reclosing function.

• Set the blocking methods (internal or external).

• Include disturbance recorder function.

• Set the operator place (Station and Remote at the same time).

• Include help dialog boxes.

• Include Bay overview function.

• Include event list for all events within the bay.

• Command to set the operator place to Station and Remote.

• Command to set the operator place to Station.

• Command to set the operator place to Remote.

• Use signal blocking.

• Use measurement blocking.

• Use command blocking.

Every bay must have a corresponding Bay library function installed, since it is used todefine the bay’s control authority level. If the same bay is present in several processpictures (Overview, Protection etc.), the Bay library function should be installed onlyin one of these pictures.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Bay library function requires that the base picture and the Station library func-tions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The size of the bay function instance is 80x40 pixels.

Page 63: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

591MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

Table 1: Common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

10 Operator place off

11 Operator place local

Page 64: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

60 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration

.

12 Operator place station

13 Operator place remote

15 Local/Remote switchinvalid

34 Bay status

35 Bay reserved

101 Selected on another moni-tor

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute Selection Index Description

BLOCKING_METHOD No blockingmethod

- No process objects created

External with-out Remoteblocking

60 Signal block/deblock indica-tion

80 Signal block/deblock com-mand

180 Actcon/actterm message.

61 Measurement block/deblockindication

81 Measurement block/deblockcommand

181 Actcon/actterm message

62 Control block/deblock indica-tion

82 Control block/deblock com-mand

182 Actcon/actterm message

Internal inMicroSCADA

100 Internal Bay blocking indica-tion

Table 1: Common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

Page 65: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

611MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

Both withoutremote blocking

60 Signal block/deblock indica-tion

80 Signal block/deblock com-mand

180 Actcon/actterm message

61 Measurement block/deblockindication

81 Measurement block/deblockcommand

181 Actcon/actterm message

62 Control block/deblock indica-tion

82 Control block/deblock com-mand

182 Actcon/actterm message

100 Internal Bay blocking indica-tion

External withremote blocking

60 Signal block/deblock indica-tion

80 Signal block/deblock com-mand

180 Actcon/actterm message

61 Measurement block/deblockindication

81 Measurement block/deblockcommand

181 Actcon/actterm message

62 Control block/deblock indica-tion

82 Control block/deblock com-mand

182 Actcon/actterm message

63 Remote block/deblock indica-tion

83 Remote block/deblock com-mand

183 Actcon/actterm message

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute Selection Index Description

Page 66: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

62 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

Both withremote blocking

60 Signal block/deblock indica-tion

80 Signal block/deblock com-mand

180 Actcon/actterm message

61 Measurement block/deblockindication

81 Measurement block/deblockcommand

181 Actcon/actterm message

62 Control block/deblock indica-tion

82 Control block/deblock com-mand

182 Actcon/actterm message

63 Remote block/deblock indica-tion

83 Remote block/deblock com-mand

183 Actcon/actterm message

100 Internal Bay blocking indica-tion

SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

Yes 72 Command operator place toStation

73 Command operator place toRemote

172 Actcon/actterm message

173 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

MULTIPLE_OPERATOR_PLACE

Yes 74 Command to set operatorplace to Station &Remote

174 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute Selection Index Description

Page 67: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

631MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay

Technical descriptions

2.2.3 Configuration with OPOT

If event recording is selected during installation, the following optional process objectscan be created from OPOT.

2.3 Object presentation

The current Station/Remote switch position is indicated by the function instance text.The function status is indicated by the function instance color.

BAY_AUTO_RECLOSURE

Yes 66 Indication for automaticreclosing In use/Off use

67 Indication for automaticreclosing in progress

86 Automatic reclosing In use/Off use

command

186 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

BAY_DISTURBANCE_REC

Yes 65 Indication for Disturbancerecorder In use/Off use

85 Command for Disturbancerecorder In use/Off use

185 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

BAY_OVERVIEW Yes 30 Indication for connection tobusbar 1

31 Indication for connection tobusbar 2

32 Indication for connection tobusbar 3

33 Indication for Bay grounded

No No objects created

Table 2: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute Selection Index Description

Table 3: Created process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

20 Key switch pos Off Only for event recording

21 Key switch pos Local Only for event recording

22 Key switch pos Remote Only for event recording

Page 68: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

64 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use theBay Control dialog box to monitor and control the station/remote switch andto access subfunctions.

Figure 3: Bay control main dialog box

The dialog box buttons has the following functionality:

Table 4: Main dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Station Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Station.

Remote Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Remote.

Station and Remote Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the operator place to Station andRemote.

Check boxes Station/Remoteswitch not control-lable

Check boxes are displayed when the Sta-tion/Remote switch is not controllable.

More Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Help Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 69: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

651MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

If the station/remote switch is not connected to the process, the dialog box simulatesthe actual operation within the database.

3.1.1 Unavailable commands

In addition to the reasons described in “Unavailable commands” on page 37, the radiobuttons for selection between the station/remote switch setting will be replaced byunavailable check boxes when the Station/Remote switch is not remotely controllableby MicroSCADA. The state of a hardware or software switch comes from an externalcontrol device and shows the current operator place.

Figure 4: Check box replacement

3.2 Control confirmation

Changing the station/remote switch requires control confirmation as described in“Control confirmation” on page 38.

Figure 5: Bay control confirmation dialog box

3.3 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

Page 70: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

66 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

3.3.1 External bay blockings dialog box

Use theExternal bay blockings dialog box to block or deblock signals in terminalsand external devices.

Figure 6: External bay blockings dialog box

Table 5: External bay blocking dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Signal block-ing

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

The indications are not updated from the process(accomplished in the terminal).

Measurementblocking

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Measurements are not updated from process(accomplished in terminal unit).

Commandblocking

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Operation commands are not sent to the process(accomplished in terminal unit).

Remote block-ing

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Currently not supported. Always unavailable.

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Executes the blocking commands.

Cancel - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialog box.

Page 71: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

671MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

3.3.2 Auto reclosure dialog box

Use theAuto reclosure dialog box to put the terminal’s automatic reclosing functionin use. This is a preselection dialog box as described on page 37.

Figure 7: The Auto reclosure dialog box

Table 6: Auto reclosure dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Auto Reclos-ure in use

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Activates the automatic reclosing function.

Auto Reclos-ure out of use

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Deactivates the automatic reclosing function.

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

The selected MicroSCADA command (activation/deactivation) is executed.

Close/Cancel - Closes the dialog box and/or cancels the opera-tion.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialog box.

Page 72: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

68 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

3.3.3 Disturbance recorder dialog box

Use theDisturbance recorderdialog box to put the terminal’s disturbance recorderfunction in use. This is a preselection dialog box as described on page 37.

Figure 8: Disturbance Recorder dialog box

Table 7: Disturbance recorder dialog box

Button Conditions Functionality

In use Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Disturbance recorder is used.

Out of use Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Disturbance recorder is not used.

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

The selected MicroSCADA command (used/not used) is executed.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the operation and/or closes the dialogbox.

Help - Displays online help for this particular libraryfunction dialog box.

Page 73: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

691MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

3.3.4 Event list dialog box

Use theEvent list dialog box to monitor events occurring in the system related to theselected bay.

Figure 9: The Event list dialog box

The text boxes below the list range command buttons display the date when the cur-rently displayed events where captured (left) and the current display update setting(right). A frozen display means that the event list will not be updated if new events arecaptured while theEvent list dialog box is displayed.

Table 8: The Event List dialog box functions

Button Conditions Functionality

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialog box.

- Display events from the previous available day.

- Display events from next available day.

- Display events from today.

- Cycle between frozen or updated event display.Available only when the event list of the presentday is displayed.

Page 74: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

70 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Bay

Technical descriptions

Page 75: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

71

Introduction

Switch device

Switch device

Use the Switch device library function to control and monitor switch devices such asbreakers and disconnectors. Function status is indicated by the instance color. The fol-lowing switch devices are supported:

• Circuit breaker

• Disconnector

• Earth switch

• Truck

• Three-position switch

Figure 1: The Switch device function instance (configured as a circuit breaker)

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Position indication.

• Open and close operations.

• Force operation.

• Operation counting:

- Individual counting of each phase.

- Single operation counting.

• Position substitution.

• Position simulation.

• Auxiliary plug monitoring (breaker and disconnector only).

• Alarm list display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• External blocking (signal, command).

• Color coded object status display.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 76: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

72 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

In addition to the general functionality listed above, the circuit breaker switch devicehas the following optional functionality:

• Synchrocheck control.

• Motorized/manually operable.

• Forced operation with:

- Interlock bypass.

- Synchrocheck bypass.

- Interlock and synchrocheck bypass.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Switch device library function requires that the base picture and the Station andBay library functions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

A function instance can be installed in any of three different sizes, small, medium andlarge.

The following symbol sizes applies to breaker, truck, disconnector and earth switchdevice function instances:

• Small, 16x20 pixels

• Medium, 32x40 pixels

• Large, 48x60 pixels

Page 77: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

731MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

The following symbol sizes applies three-position switch device function instances:

• Small, 32x20 pixels

• Medium, 64x40 pixels

• Large, 96x60 pixels

The preceding areas listed are the maximum instance areas required to display theopen state switch device symbol. For more information see “Installation Tool” onpage 8.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

Page 78: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

74 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings example (earth switch)

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

Page 79: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

751MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

2.2.2 Configuration with RT

Select the appropriate symbol set from the preview window. The representation will bereset if the type device is changed. The function require a selector and a symbol for thefollowing conditions:

Table 1: Selector values for symbol presentation

Selector Condition Blinking Defaultcolor

0 Intermediate; selected and under command Yes White

1 Intermediate; selected on monitor No White

2 Intermediate; update blocked, invalid value or obso-lete value

No Magenta

3 Intermediate; unacknowledged alarm Yes Red

4 Intermediate; acknowledged alarm No Red

5 Intermediate; warning or blocking (alarms, events,printouts or reprocessing)

No Yellow

6 Intermediate; manually entered or substituted No Cyan

7 Intermediate; control blocked No Brown

8 Intermediate; normal state No Green

10 Closed; selected, under command Yes White

11 Closed; selected on monitor No White

12 Closed; update blocked, invalid value or obsoletevalue

No Magenta

13 Closed; unacknowledged alarm Yes Red

14 Closed; acknowledged alarm No Red

15 Closed; warning or blocking (alarms, events, print-outs or reprocessing)

No Yellow

16 Closed; manually entered or substituted No Cyan

17 Closed; control blocked No Brown

18 Closed; normal state No Green

20 Open; selected, under command Yes White

21 Open; selected on monitor No White

22 Open; update blocked, invalid value or obsoletevalue

No Magenta

23 Open; unacknowledged alarm Yes Red

24 Open; acknowledged alarm No Red

25 Open; warning or blocking (alarms, events, printoutsor reprocessing)

No Yellow

26 Open; manually entered or substituted No Cyan

27 Open; control blocked No Brown

28 Open; normal state No Green

Page 80: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

76 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

By default there are nine sets of symbols in three different sizes for each device type.These default representations are shown below as medium sized. Please note that in anactual system the symbols representing selectors 0, 3, 10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 33 and 40 areblinking to draw attention.

Each switch device has a number of representation formats available, and within eachformat a number of symbols depicting the possible states of the switch device. Eachrepresentation format is stored in a file selected using RT. The naming convention forrepresentation files are:

<device><size><represention format> where:

30 Faulty; selected, under command Yes White

31 Faulty; selected on monitor No White

32 Faulty; update blocked, invalid value or obsoletevalue

No Magenta

33 Faulty; unacknowledged alarm Yes Red

34 Faulty; acknowledged alarm No Red

35 Faulty; warning or blocking (alarms, events, printoutsor reprocessing)

No Yellow

36 Faulty; manually entered or substituted No Cyan

37 Faulty; control blocked No Brown

38 Faulty; normal state No Green

40 Unknown; selected, under command Yes White

41 Unknown; selected on command No White

42 Unknown; not sampled or object missing No Magenta

Table 2:

Mnemonic

<device> Defines the type of device used

Replacement Meaning

R_BREAK Breaker

R_DISC Disconnector and earth switch

R_TRUCK Truck

R_3POS2 Three position switch

Table 1: Selector values for symbol presentation

Selector Condition Blinking Defaultcolor

Page 81: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

771MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

The representation file for a disconnector using medium sized function instances andsymbols from the 8th representation format is namedR_DISCM8.

<size> Sets the size of the displayed symbol

Replacement Meaning

““ (empty string) Small picture

M Medium sized picture

L Large picture

<representa-tion format>

Sets the representation format, the type of symbols wanted forthe function instance

Replacement Meaning

““ (empty string) Used when there is only one typeof representation available

The column number of therepresentation preview inRT

Table 2:

Mnemonic

Page 82: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

78 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

2.2.3 Representations

Figure 3: Available representation symbols

1

2

3

4

Table 3:

Preview Switch device

1 Breaker

2 Disconnector and earth switch

3 Truck

4 Three position switch

Table 4:

Row Device position

A Intermediate position (middle state)

B Closed position

Page 83: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

791MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

2.2.4 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration, regardless of switch device type.

C Open position

D Faulty position

E Unknown position

Table 4:

Row Device position

Table 5: Switch device common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

10 Position indication

16 Position error

20 Position event

101 Selected on another moni-tor

Table 6: SCT attributes vs. created process objects, independent of device type

SCT attribute Selection Index (IX) Description

BLOCKING_METHOD External 62 Control block indication

82 Control block command

182 Actcon/actterm message

60 Update block indication

80 Update block command

180 Actcon/actterm message

Internal 100 Internal blocking

MOTORIZED Yes 15 Interlocked indication

18 Control block process indica-tion

53 Command error indication

54 Selected indication

70 Select/open/close command

170 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

Page 84: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

80 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

a) Using qualifier of commandb) Using own command

INTERLOCK_BYPASS Yesa 55 Interlock bypass indication

Yesb 55 Interlock bypass indication

75 Interlock bypass command

175 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

SUBSTITUTE_POSITION

Yes 61 Substitute indication

90 Substitute command

190 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

Table 7: SCT attributes vs. created process objects, specific for CB’s

SCT attribute Selection Index (IX) Description

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPESYNCHROCHECK_BYPASS

BYPASS_METHOD

Yesa 36 Synchrocheck failed indica-tion

56 Synchrocheck bypass indica-tion

Yesb 36 Synchrocheck failed indica-tion

56 Synchrocheck bypass indica-tion

76 Synchrocheck bypass com-mand

176 Actcon/actterm message

No No objects created

AUXILIARY_PLUG Yes 30 Auxiliary plug indication

No No objects created

Table 6: SCT attributes vs. created process objects, independent of device type

SCT attribute Selection Index (IX) Description

Page 85: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

811MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

a) CB with synchrocheck, using qualifier of commandb) CB with synchrocheck, using own command

OPERATION_COUNTER

Single counter 91 Operation counter total com-mand

94 Operation counter trip com-mand

191 Actcon/actterm message

194 Actcon/actterm message

211 Operation counter total indi-cation

214 Operation counter trip indica-tion

3 phase sepa-rate counters

91 Operation counter total L1command

92 Operation counter total L2command

93 Operation counter total L3command

191 Actcon/actterm message

192 Actcon/actterm message

193 Actcon/actterm message

94 Operation counter trip L1command

95 Operation counter trip L2command

96 Operation counter trip L3command

194 Actcon/actterm message

195 Actcon/actterm message

196 Actcon/actterm message

211 Operation counter total L1indication

212 Operation counter total L2indication

213 Operation counter total L3indication

214 Operation counter trip L1 indi-cation

215 Operation counter trip L2 indi-cation

216 Operation counter trip L3 indi-cation

No No objects created

Table 7: SCT attributes vs. created process objects, specific for CB’s

SCT attribute Selection Index (IX) Description

Page 86: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

82 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Switch device

Technical descriptions

2.2.5 Configuration with OPOT

The following additional process objects can be created by using OPOT:

Warning!Alarms from the optional process objects will not be indicated by a symbol colorchange in the process picture. Such alarms will only be indicated in the alarm list andthe active message list.

Table 8: Additional process objects

Index Description Functionality

31 Tripped indication Set if position is changed without command.

32 SF6 pressure low Set if the SF6 pressure is too low.

33 Drive error Set if the drive error from the circuit breaker.

34 Pole discrepancy Set if there is a pole discrepancy.

35 Handcrank inserted Handcrank inserted or removed.

37 Circuit breakerclose block

Close block signal from the switch device.

50 Command localresponse

External event generation for local command.

51 Command remoteresponse

External event generation for remote command.

63 Command error Time-out because new position was not reached.

64 Reserve error Reservation supervision time-out.

65 Long operation time-out

Max. allowed time between two command expired.

66 Command sequenceerror

Command sequence was not in the logical order.

Page 87: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

831MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use the main dialog box to monitor and control the switch device.

Figure 4: Main dialog box as displayed for a circuit breaker

The dialog box buttons have the following functionality:

a) <device> is a mnemonic for the actual switch device selected during configuration.

Table 9: Switch device dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Open <device>a Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Opens the device. Unavailable if device isopen.

Close <device>a Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Closes the device. Unavailable if device isclosed.

More... Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Help Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 88: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

84 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.2 Control confirmation

Changing the switch device state requires control confirmation as described in “Con-trol confirmation” on page 38.

Figure 5: Control confirmation dialog box

3.3 Auxiliary plug

Switch devices installed in a truck often has an indication available to tell if the auxil-iary plug between the truck and cubicle is connected. If the indication object in theprocess database is not connected to the process, the auxiliary plug dialog box is dis-played. ClickYesor No to confirm the plug state.

Figure 6: Auxiliary plug dialog box

Table 10: Auxiliary plug dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Yes Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the indication signal for auxiliary plugas connected and close the dialog box.

No Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the indication signal for auxiliary plugas disconnected and close the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 89: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

851MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.4 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

3.4.1 Operation countings dialog box

Use theOperation countingsdialog box to monitor the number of device statechanges. The counter is increased every time the device is operated.

There are two counter groups, one for total operations (including trip) and one for tripoperations. The counters can be configured for individual counting of each phase orfor counting operations regardless of phase.

Configured for three phases with individual counters

Figure 7: Operation countings dialog box, separate counters for each phase

Configured for three phases and single counter

Figure 8: Operating countings dialog box, one common counter

Page 90: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

86 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.4.2 Counter settings dialog box

Use theCounter settingsdialog box to reset or set new values for operation count-ings. This is a preselection command dialog box as described in “Preselection dialogbox” on page 37.

Configured for three phases with individual counters

Figure 9: Counter settings dialog box, separate counters for each phase

Table 11: Operation countings dialog box functions

Button Conditions Functionality

Counter Settings Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Displays the Counter Settings dialog box toreset or set new counter values.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 91: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

871MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

Configured for three phases and single counter

Figure 10: Counter settings dialog box, single common counter

Enter an appropriate numeric in theNew Total Oper and/orNew Trip Oper textboxes to set the counter’s starting value.

Table 12: Counter settings dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Reset - Resets the counter.

OK - The set values are transmitted to the con-trol device unit.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes thedialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this particularlibrary function dialog box.

Page 92: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

88 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.4.3 External blockings dialog box

Use theExternal blockings dialog box to block or deblock signals in terminals andexternal devices.

Figure 11: External Blockings dialog box

3.4.4 Forced operation dialog box

Use theForced operationdialog box to control the switch device to any state regard-less of the current state indication. Depending on the current control method (real orsimulated process) commands are either sent to the device control unit or used inter-nally in the process database.

Table 13: External Blockings dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Update blocking Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Indications are not sent to the process(accomplished in terminal unit).

Command blocking Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Operation commands are not sent to theprocess (accomplished in terminal unit).

OK - Executes the blocking commands.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes thedialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this particularlibrary function dialog box.

Page 93: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

891MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

.

Figure 12: Forced operation dialog box (breaker example)

a) <device> is a mnemonic for the actual switch device selected during configuration.b) Requires command confirmation.

Table 14: Forced Operation dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

SynchrocheckBypass

- Toggle button. The synchrocheck functionis bypassed by the forced open or closecommand.

Interlocking Bypass - Toggle button. The interlocking function isbypassed be the forced open or close com-mand.

Force <device>a

OpenbSwitch devicemust be motor-ized, authorizationlevel 2 or higher

Command button. Executes the forcedcommand.

Force <device>a

ClosebSwitch devicemust be motor-ized, authorizationlevel 2 or higher

Command button. Executes the forcedcommand.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 94: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

90 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.4.5 Substitute position dialog box

Use theSubstitute positiondialog box to change the position indication in the termi-nal and the process database. This is a preselection command dialog box as describedin “Preselection dialog box” on page 37.

Figure 13: Substitute position dialog box (breaker example)

Table 15: Substitute Position dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Option buttons Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the new state indication. When the dia-log box is opened, these buttons are set toindicate the current state of the device.

OK - Updates the state indication in the terminaland process database.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes thedialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this particular libraryfunction dialog box.

Page 95: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

911MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

3.4.6 Position simulation dialog box

Use thePosition simulation dialog box to change the position indication in the proc-ess database only. This is a preselection command dialog box as described in “Prese-lection dialog box” on page 37.

Figure 14: Position simulation dialog box (breaker example)

a) Unavailable if simulation is off.

Table 16: Position simulation dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Simulation optionbutton

Authorizationlevel 2 or higher

Sets the simulation mode. If there is noprocess interface defined in the database,the simulation cannot be set to off.

Position option but-tonsa

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the new state indication.

OK - Updates the state indication in the processdatabase.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes thedialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this particularlibrary function Dialog box.

Page 96: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

92 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Switch device

Technical descriptions

Page 97: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

93

Introduction

Measurement function

Measurement function

Use the Measurement library function to monitor analog or pulse counter values inprocess pictures. The measurements can be presented as numerical values, as bars orjust as a measurement symbol. The advantage of presenting the measurements as barsis that the alarm and warning limits are shown together with the measurement, makingcomparisons of the present measurement value and limit value simple. Function statusis indicated by the instance color.

Figure 1: Three types of function instances; symbol, horizontal and vertical

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Up to four measurements values displayed per function instance.

• Supports analog input (AI) values.

• Supports pulse counter (PC) values.

• Bar/unit presentation.

• Alarm state acknowledgment for all limit alarms.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• Object messages list display.

• Editable alarm limits.

• Zero deadband setting.

• Fast trending display.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 98: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

94 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The measurement library function requires that the base picture and the Station andBay library functions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

All function instances (horisontal, vertical and symbol only) can be installed in any ofthree different sizes, small, medium and large. The following table contains the mini-mum sizes. Additional space may be required for value display, and will differ depend-ing on the number of values displayed.

!Note!Use only one size of the function instances within the same bay. This because of differ-ences in grid snap of the feeder lines.

The following figure shows examples of all three different types the function instancein typical installations.

Figure 2: Typical usage examples

Table 1: Function instance sizes

Horisontal Vertical Symbol only

Small 80x20 pixels 16x80 pixels 16x20 pixels

Medium 96x40 pixels 32x100 pixels 32x40 pixels

Large 112x60 pixels 48x120 pixels 48x60 pixels

1 2

3

Page 99: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

951MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

!Note!The attributes STATION_LN, BAY_LN, STATION_NAME and BAY_NAME are forfuture functionality only and does not need to be set.

Table 2: Typical usage examples

Example Explanation

1 Symbol only

2 Symbol and horisontal field

3 Symbol and vertical field

Page 100: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

96 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

Fig. 3 SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with RT

A suitable symbol for the function instance can be selected from the fileRPU_MEAS.PIR. The representations are described in detail in “Object presentation”on page 98.

Page 101: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

971MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

The naming convention for the representation file is:

R_MEAS<size><type> where:

The default representation filename isR_MEAS1, that is, small normal symbol.

2.2.3 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

Table 3:

Mnemonic

<size> Sets the size of the displayed symbol

Replacement Meaning

““ (empty string) Small picture

M Medium sized picture

L Large picture

<type> Sets the type of symbol, i.e. graphical representation of thetype of measurement made

Replacement Meaning

1 normal symbol

2 through 7 Voltage transducer 1-6

8 Current

9 Voltage

10 Active power

11 Reactive power

12-15 Current transducer 1-4

Table 4: Process objects created independent of SCT configuration

Index(IX)

Description

101 Selected on another moni-tor

Page 102: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

98 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration.

2.3 Object presentation

The symbol is common to all four measurements (The process objects attributes AZ,AL and AR are only checked for analog measurements, not for pulse counters). Notethat “Selected on monitor” has the highest priority and “Normal state” the lowest.

The function status is indicated by the function instance color. The measurand valuesare presented with the same color as the function instance. If the value has more thansix characters, six stars are (******) are shown instead. If the measurand is not sam-pled a magenta colored question mark is displayed.

Table 5: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT attribute Selection Index (IX) Description

BLOCKING_METHOD Internal 100 Internal blocking

No - No process objects

Page 103: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

991MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use theMeasurementdialog box to view the available measurements. In the follow-ing illustration the dialog box has three available tabs, a current measurement, a powerand an energy measurement. The fourth tab is unavailable, indicated by the dimmedlabel.

Figure 4: Measurement dialog box

The following is displayed in the text boxes:

• Present measured value.

• Minimum recorded value since last value reset.

• Maximum recorded value since last value reset.

• Frozen value.

Page 104: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

100 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

TheFrozen text box is a momentary “picture” of the present measured value, eitherthe value that was measured when the dialog box was opened, or the value that wasmeasured the moment the frozen valueResetbutton was clicked.

The present measurement value and minimum and maximum recorded values aredynamically updated. If an energy measurement is displayed no minimum or maxi-mum values exist and theMin. andMax. text boxes contains “--”.

!Note!Changes made to the measurement settings are active while the dialog box is open.When closed, the default settings are returned. The defaults can be modified from SCT.If the function is not connected to the actual process, the values can be entered in thevalue field.

The dialog box buttons have the following functionality:

a) Only available for horizontal or vertical function instances.b) Only available for horizontal function instances.

Table 6: Measurement dialog box buttons

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Show on station pic-ture

Authorizationlevel 1 or abovea

Toggle button. Selects whether the meas-urement value should be displayed in thefunction instance.

Show as bar Authorizationlevel 1 or aboveb

Toggle button. Selects whether the meas-urement value should be displayed as a bar(option-set) or a number (normal).

Show unit Authorizationlevel 1 or aboveb

Toggle button. Selects whether the meas-urement unit should be displayed or not.

Reset Authorizationlevel 1 or above

Command button. Sets the minimum, maxi-mum or frozen value text box contents tothe present value measured.

More - Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close - Closes the dialog box. The trend window (ifopen) will still be displayed.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 105: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1011MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

3.1.1 Unavailable commands

In addition to the reasons described in “Unavailable commands” on page 37 the fol-lowing table describes in which case elements of the main dialog box are dimmed.

3.2 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

!Note!If a pulse counter measurement is displayed only theBlockingsandObject messagedialog boxes are available.

If the measurement process object is missing only theObject messagedialog box isavailable.

Table 7: Reasons for dimming main dialog box contents

Dimmed Reason

Show on station picture Configured with a symbol function instance.Function instance is selected on another monitor.Process object is missing.Measurement not sampled.

Show as bar Configured with a symbol function instance.

Configured with a vertical function instance.

Configured with a horizontal function instance and con-taining a pulse counter measurement.Function instance is selected on another monitor.Process object is missing.Measurement not sampled.

Show unit Configured with a symbol function instance.

Configured with a vertical symbol function instance.Function instance is selected on another monitor.Object is missing.Measurement not sampled.

Reset buttons Function instance is selected on another monitor.Object is missing.Measurement not sampled.

Pulse counter measurement (only for min. and max.values).

Text boxes Function instance is selected on another monitor.Object is missing.Measurement not sampled.

Page 106: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

102 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

3.2.1 Edit limits dialog box

Use theEdit Limits dialog box to set the alarm and warning limits for the selectedmeasurement. This is a preselection dialog box as described on page 37.

Figure 5: Edit limits dialog box

Enter the appropriate limits in the corresponding text boxes. The text boxes will beavailable for entry if the user’s authorization level is 1 or higher. The dialog box hasthe following functionality:

3.2.2 Zero deadband setting dialog box

Use theZero deadband settingdialog box to set a threshold value under which meas-ured values are displayed as zero.For example, a current measurement can indicate asmall current even though the switching device is open.

Table 8: Edit Limits dialog box functions

Button Conditions Functionality

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Writes the values to the process database.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes thedialog box.

Help - Displays the online help for this specific dia-log box.

Page 107: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1031MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

By setting an appropriate deadband threshold the current measurement value will bezero when the device is open, avoiding confusion or misunderstanding trend or bar dis-plays.This is a preselection dialog box, as described on page 37.

Fig. 6 Zero Deadband Setting dialog box

a) The new deadband settings will be used from the next sampling cycle

3.2.3 Fast trending

The Fast trend (FT) window/dialog box is a chart display for analog measurements.Several trend windows can be open at the same time on the same monitor, but only onetrend window can be used for each measured value. The same trend window can bedisplayed on other monitors as well.

Table 9: Zero Deadband Setting dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Deadband super-vision enabled

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Toggle button. Enables deadband supervision.

OKa Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Writes the values to the process database.

Close/Cancel - Cancels the command and/or closes the dia-log box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 108: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

104 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

To select the measurement to display, click the appropriate measurement tab in themain dialog box. Then clickFast trending on theMore button menu. A small trendwindow is displayed.

Fig. 7 Small size trend window

Move the window by grabbing the title bar. Click the button to close the window.Click the button to display the trend dialog box.

Fig. 8 The trend dialog box

The alarm (red) and warning (yellow) levels are displayed as lines in the trend win-dow. The Y-axis scaling is normally set to show 10% below and above the lower andupper alarm limit, respectively. If no alarm limits are set, the window is automaticallyscaled to ensured that the process data can be displayed without clipping.

Page 109: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1051MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

A full window can display 180 samples. Samples are displayed beginning at the lefthand side, then added to the right. When the right hand side of the window is reached,the graph is scrolled to the left, removing (discarding) the earliest recorded samplesand new values are added until the right hand side is reached again. The amount ofsamples to discard can be set in theSettingsdialog box.

The trend dialog box contains text boxes displaying minimum, maximum, mean andpresent values.

Use theSettingsdialog box to set:

• the Y-axis scale.

• the colors for the background and the curve.

• the sampling interval.

• the amount of sample to discard when the window is full (step size).

• the title bar text.

Click theSettingsbutton to display theSettingsdialog box.

Table 10: Trend dialog box buttons

Button Condition Functionality

Settings - Displays the Settings dialog box.

Close - Closes the expanded window and displays thesmall sized trend window.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 110: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

106 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

3.2.4 Fast trending settings dialog box

All settings affects both the small and expanded trend windows. Settings made for aclosed trend window will be used the next time the same window is displayedagain.This is a preselection dialog box as described on page 37.

Figure 9: Settings dialog box

a) Max length is ten charactersb) Max length is 45 characters

Table 11: Settings for the fast trend dialog box

Setting Description

Update interval List box. The update interval in seconds. Defines how oftenthe trend is updated with new values from the process data-base.

Stepsize List box. The number of samples to be discarded when thegraph hits the right hand side of the window.

Y-axis max. Text box. Value to be used for the upper level of the Y-axis

Y-axis min. Text box. Value that will be used for the lower level of the Y-axis.

Always show trend Check box. When checked, the trend window will always bedisplayed when the station process picture is displayed.

Label Text box. Title bar labels for the small sized trend windowa

and the expanded trend windowb.

Colors List box. Sets the color of the trend graph and background.

Page 111: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1071MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

The sampling period can be set to 1-100 seconds, in steps of 1-2-5-10-20-50-100 sec-onds.

!Note!Fast sampling can affect the communication performance.

!Note!Settings will be applied during the next sampling. This could mean that made settingswould be visible for some time depending on the set sampling rate.

Table 12: Settings dialog box buttons

Button Description

OK Store the settings.

Default Settings Sets all settings to default values.

Close/Cancel Cancels the command and/or closes the dialog box.

Help Displays online help for this specific dialog box.

Page 112: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

108 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Measurement function

Technical descriptions

Page 113: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

109

Introduction

Phase displacement

Phase displacement

Use the Phase displacement library function to graphically display the value of thephase displacement.

Figure 1: Phase displacement function instance

1 Introduction

This function is a complement to the Measurement library function. It can only be usedtogether with a measurement function instance.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The phase displacement function requires that the base picture and the Station, Bayand Measurement library functions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The phase displacement library function instance can be installed in one of three sizes:

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 114: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

110 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Phase displacement

Technical descriptions

• Small, 192x180 pixels, radius 60 pixels.

• Medium, 224x220 pixels, radius 75 pixels.

• Large, 256x240 pixels, radius 90 pixels.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings

Explanation of the attributes can be found in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with POT

No process object is created for phase displacement, the process object with index 148from the measurement library function is used.

3 Tutorial

The function displays the phase displacement value graphically in the range ±180º.The function instance is designed as a “angle clock”, using a pointer to display theangle value. The instance is also equipped with a text box displaying the numericalangle value with one decimal.

Page 115: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

111

Introduction

REx 5xx supervision

REx 5xx supervision

Use the REx 5xx supervision library function to supervise and monitor REx 5xx seriesterminals.Terminal status is indicated by the instance color and by generated eventsand alarms.

Figure 1: REx 5xx supervision function instance

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Color coded object status display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• Object messages list display.

• Signal state display.

• Device information display.

• Selectable function instance size.

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

The following options can be chosen during installation:

• Include online help.

• Use blocking.

• Label position.

• Selection of supervision device (assignment to the different apparatus, likeREC xxx, REL xxx, RET xxx and REF xxx).

• Device description.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 116: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

112 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The REx 5xx supervision library function requires that the base picture is installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The function instance can be installed in one of three sizes:

• Small, 16x20 pixels.

• Medium, 32x40 pixels.

• Large, 48x60 pixels.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

Page 117: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1131MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with RT

The naming convention for the representation file is:

R_SUP<size> where:

The default file name isR_SUP, that is, a small function instance.

Table 1:

Mnemonic

<size> Sets the size of the displayed symbol

Replacement Meaning

““ (empty string) Small picture

M Medium sized picture

L Large picture

Page 118: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

114 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

2.2.3 Configuration with POT

POT will create process objects depending on the choice of SUPERVISION_DEVICEin SCT. However, these are always the same. See the appendix for a complete listing ofthe created process objects.

Change the IU attribute to set which process objects should influence the representa-tion.

2.3 Object presentation

The actual state is presented by different symbols (configured with the representationtool). The function status is indicated by the function instance color.

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use the main dialog box to view the object name and signal state.

Figure 3: Supervision main dialog box (REL 316 example)

Table 2: Main dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

More - Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Page 119: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1151MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

3.2 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

3.2.1 Signal state dialog box

Use theSignal statedialog box to view:

• the terminal supervision status (General tab).

• the binary input modules status (Hardware tab).

• the milliampere input modules status (Values tab).

• the terminal blocking status (Blocking tab).

Tabs that does not contain any signals will be unavailable and dimmed. Tabs will becolored according to the state of the objects it contains.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Table 2: Main dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Page 120: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

116 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

Figure 4: REx 5xx supervision signal state dialog box

Table 3: Signal state dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 121: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1171MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

The status is displayed according to the default color presentation.

Figure 5: Object status

Blocked events in theBlockings tab are depicted with a green filled box.

In theSupervision, ValuesandHardware tabs, unacknowledged alarms are depictedwith a red, blinking filled box replaced by a fixed red box when the alarm is acknowl-edged. When the status changes from alarm to normal the box will be outlined. Unac-knowledged alarms which changes into the normal state without being acknowledgedwill be depicted by a blinking red outline.

3.2.2 Device information dialog box

Use theDevice information dialog box to view terminal data added during configura-tion with SCT, such as device type, version, and release.

Figure 6: Device information dialog box

Table 4: Device information dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Page 122: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

118 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

REx 5xx supervision

Technical descriptions

Page 123: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

119

Introduction

Transformer voltage control

Transformer voltage control

Use the Transformer voltage control library function to control and monitor transform-ers. Two function instances can be installed, one for control and one for displayingmeasurements such as secondary output voltage, tap position and more. The status isindicated by the function instance color. In addition to the color coding, any abnormalstatus is indicated by an information message in the info bar of the function’s main dia-log box.

Figure 1: The Transformer voltage control function instances, control (left) andmeasurement (right)

1 Introduction

The library function has the following functionality:

• Color coded object status display.

• Measurement display.

• REC 580 voltage regulator control.

• Voltage regulator operator place setting.

• Tap changer target positioning.

• Emergency off function.

• Alarm list display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment for all voltage control alarms.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• Object messages list display.

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 124: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

120 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

The following options can be chosen during installation:

• Function instance size.

• Main dialog box availability.

• Bay independent Station/Remote switch.

• Possibility to set the voltage characteristic.

• Use internal blocking.

• Possibility to change settings.

• Possibility to set the target position.

• Include online help.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Transformer voltage control library function requires that the base picture and theStation and Bay library functions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The control function instance can be installed in one size, 80x80 pixels. The represen-tation symbol, however can be installed in different sizes, the largest covering theentire instance area.

The same applies in some extent to the measurement instance. When installed, a 80x80pixels sunken square is displayed in the picture tool, but the actual area covered duringrun-time depends on the number of values displayed, ranging from one value, 80x20pixels up to 80x80 pixels when five values are displayed.

Page 125: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1211MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

!Note!The size of the measurement instance is not set in RT, but automatically set during run-time depending on the selected number of values to display. To be certain that noinstances are obscured, always place instances according to the relevant maximumsize, 80x80 pixels.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT attributes, control function instance

Page 126: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

122 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

Figure 3: SCT attributes, measurement function instance

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with RT

A suitable symbol is selected by using RT. The naming convention for the representa-tions are:

R_TRA<windings><size><alignment><prim. pos.> , where:

Table 1: Representation mnemonics

Mnemonic Function Values Value meaning

<windings> Number of windings 2 Two winding transformer

3 Three winding transformer

<size> Symbol size within func-tion instance

v Very small

s Small

m Medium

l Large

<alignment> Symbol alignment withinfunction instance

v Vertical

h Horisontal

<prim. pos.> Symbol primary positionwithin function instance

l Left

r Right

u Up

d Down

Page 127: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1231MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

The representation for a two winding medium sized symbol, vertically aligned withprimary position up should the be namedR_TRA2mvu. Representations are stored inthe file RPU_TRA.PIR.

2.2.3 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

Table 2: Common process objects

Index (IX) Description

10 Tap changer position

11 Automatic mode

12 Manual mode

15 Minimum position

16 Maximum position

30 Parallel control mode

31 Single control mode

32 Master control mode

33 Slave control mode

36 Tap changer block

37 Voltage control

58 Tap changer processing

70 Position command

71 Automatic/manual command

73 Emergency off command

100 Indication for blocking dialog box

101 Selected on another monitor

170 Raise/lower command response

171 Auto/manual command response

173 Emergency off command response

201 Reference voltage

202 Process voltage

Page 128: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

124 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration:

Table 3: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT Attribute Selection Index Description

SET_CHARACTERISTIC_DIALOG_VISIBLE

Off - No objects created

On 34 Inverse time characteristicmode

35 Linear time characteristicmode

74 Linear/inverse command

74 Command response

SET_REF_VOLTAGE_DIALOG_VISIBLE

Off No object created

On 91 Preselection for referencevoltage

191 Command response

92 Set new value

192 Command response

200 Preselected voltage

203 Step difference

TARGET_POSITION_DIALOG_VISIBLE

Off No objects created

On 90 Voltage control target positioncommand

190 Command response

SR_SWITCH_INDEPENDENT_FROM_BAY

Off - No objects created

On 50 Indication for out of use

51 Local indication

52 Station indication

53 Remote indication

72 Station/remote command

172 Command response

BLOCKING_METHOD None No objects created

Internal 100 Internal process objects forblocking dialog box

WITH_EXTERNAL_BLOCKING_INDICATION

Off No objects created

On 60 External update blocking

62 External command blocking

Page 129: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1251MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

2.2.4 Configuration with OPOT

The following process objects are used for generating text in the event list:

Table 4: Generated process objects for event recording

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

39 Voltage control block Regulation algorithm is blocked.

40 Positive deviation The difference between the reference and proc-ess voltage is positive.

42 Negative deviation The difference between the reference and proc-ess voltage is negative.

43 Fast step down mode The fast step down mode is used for compensat-ing the difference between the process and ref-erence voltage.

54 Local automatic/manualcommand

Local automatic/manual mode command.

55 Remote automatic/man-ual command

Remote automatic/manual mode command.

56 Local position command Local raise/lower command.

57 Remote position com-mand

Remote raise/lower command.

59 Local set value to ref. volt.command

Local set reference voltage command.

63 Remote set value to ref.volt. command

Remote set reference voltage command.

64 Tap changer position Tap changer position indication.

65 Local reference voltagecommand

Local send reference voltage to the device com-mand.

66 Remote reference voltagecommand

Remote send reference voltage to the devicecommand.

67 Local time characteristiccommand

Local switch time characteristic command.

68 Remote time characteristiccommand

Remote switch time characteristic command.

Page 130: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

126 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Use theVoltage control dialog box to change operation mode and to set the trans-former output voltage

Figure 4: Voltage control dialog box

The following information are displayed in the text boxes:

• Operation mode:

- Single/parallel.

- Master/slave.

- Station/remote.

Page 131: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1271MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

• Transformer output reference voltage.

• Actual transformer output voltage.

The current tap position is indicated by the slider (below the voltage values) and theinteger value displayed above the slider marker.

It is possible to use the measurement library function in order to display warning andalarm limits for the transformer voltage.

a) Unavailable in a simulated process.

3.1.1 Unavailable commands

In addition to the reasons described in “Unavailable commands” on page 37 com-mands will be unavailable if any of the following conditions occur:

Table 5: Voltage control dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Station/remoteoption buttons

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Selects between the mutually exclusive volt-age control places station and remote.a

Manual/Automaticoption buttons

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Selects between the mutually exclusivecontrol methods manual and automatic.a

Emergency off Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

The emergency off command is sent to thecontrol terminal.a

Slider increment but-tons Raise/Lower

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Raises or lowers the tap changer positionone step at a time.a

More - Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Table 6:

Unavailable Condition

Station/remote

Manual/automatic

Lower/raise

The tap changer processing process object status is set to 1,indicating some kind of problem. This can occur depending onseveral system dependent reasons. Refer to the installed codelistings.

Station/remote Process objects is missing.

The object status is not sampled.

Manual/automatic The operator place is other than station.

Remote mode is not set.

Process objects are not sampled.

Page 132: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

128 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3.2 Control confirmation

Changing any settings requires control confirmation as described in “Control confir-mation” on page 38.

Figure 5: Control confirmation dialog box

3.3 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

Lower The operator place is other than station.

Remote mode is not set.

The tap changer is in minimum position.

The tap changer is blocked.

Process objects are not sampled.

Raise The operator place is other than station.

Remote mode is not set.

The tap changer is in maximum position.

The tap changer is blocked.

Process objects are not sampled.

Table 6:

Unavailable Condition

Page 133: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1291MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3.3.1 Change characteristic dialog box

Use theChange characteristicdialog box to set the control characteristic. Choosebetween linear time or inverse time voltage control.

Figure 6: Change characteristic dialog box

a) Unavailable if the operator place is other than Station. Selection is sent to the terminalonly if the function is connected to a real process.

b) Unavailable if the operator place is other than Station and the commands are blocked.

Table 7: Set characteristic dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Functionality

Activate newsettings

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sends the characteristic selection to the terminal.a

Linear/Inverseoption buttons

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Selects one of the mutually exclusive control meth-ods linear time or inverse time voltage control.b

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialog box.

Page 134: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

130 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3.3.2 Activate simulation dialog box

Use theActivate simulation dialog box to activate voltage control simulation. This isa preselection dialog box as described in page 37.

Figure 7: Activate simulation dialog box

a) Unavailable if the operator place is other than Stationb) Unavailable if the commands are blocked

Table 8: Activate simulation dialog box functions

Buttons Condition Description

On/Off option but-tons

Authorizationlevel 1 or above

Activates or deactivates simulation.a

OK Authorizationlevel 1 or above

All changes on the settings of the simulationare taken over with pressing this button.b

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 135: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1311MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3.3.3 Set reference voltage dialog box

Use theSet reference voltagedialog box to alter the set point of transformer outputvoltage

Figure 8: Set reference voltage dialog box

Type the new value in the text box, or use the spin (arrow) buttons to increase ordecrease the value. The text box and spin buttons will be unavailable if:

• The users authorization level is lower than 1.

• The operator place is set to other than Station.

• The commands are blocked.

a) Unavailable in a simulated process. Unavailable if the operator place is set to otherthan Station or if the function is blocked.

Table 9: Set reference voltage dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Send new settings Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sends the set point value to the control ter-minal.a

Activate new set-tings

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

The set point value will be used by the con-trol terminal, meaning that the voltage con-trol function will start regulating thetransformer voltage in respect to this newset point.a

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 136: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

132 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Transformer voltage control

Technical descriptions

3.3.4 Target position dialog box

Use theTarget position dialog box to set the tap changer to a specific position. This isa preselection dialog box as described in page 37.

Figure 9: Target position dialog box

Buttons that would set the tap changer in unavailable positions will be dimmed.

a) Unavailable in a simulated process. Unavailable if manual mode is not set, or if the op-erator place is set to other than station.

Table 10: Target position dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Position buttons1-30

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the tap changer to the correspondingposition.a

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 137: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

133

Introduction

Coil tap changer

Coil tap changer

Use the Coil tap changer library function to control and monitor transformer coil tapchangers. Two function instances can be installed, one for control and one for display-ing measurements such as secondary output voltage, tap position and more. The statusis indicated by the function instance color. In addition to the color coding, any abnor-mal status is indicated by an information message in the info bar of the function’s maindialog box.

Figure 1: The Coil tap changer function instances, control (left) and measurements(right)

1 Introduction

The coil tap changer can be installed in two variants, with step positions or with pro-portional positions.The library function has the following functionality:

• Color coded object status display.

• Measurement display:

- Nominal voltage.

- Tap position.

• Tap changer target positioning, steps or per cent.

• Emergency off function.

• Stop tap changer function.

• Alarm list display.

• Alarm state acknowledgment for all voltage control alarms.

• Internal blocking (event, alarm, printout, update, reprocessing).

• Object messages list display.

• Information messages display.

• Integrated online help.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 138: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

134 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

The following options can be chosen during the installation:

• Function instance size.

• Main dialog box availability.

• Coil tap changer type (steps/per cent).

• Use internal blocking.

• Possibility to set target position.

• Include online help.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The coil tap changer library function requires that the base picture and the Station andBay library functions are installed.

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The control function instance can be installed in any of three different sizes, small,medium and large.

• Small, 48x60 pixels.

• Medium, 64x80 pixels.

• Large, 80x100 pixels.

!Note!Use only one size of the function instances within the same bay. This because of differ-ences in grid snap of the feeder lines.

When the measurement instance is installed, a 100x100 pixels sunken square is dis-played in the picture tool, but the actual area covered at run-time depends on thenumber of values displayed, one value, 100x20 pixels or two values, 100x40 pixels.

Page 139: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1351MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

!Note!The size of the measurement instance is not set in RT, but automatically set during run-time depending on the selected number of values to display. To be certain that noinstances are obscured, always place instances according to the relevant maximumsize, 100x100 pixels.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

Page 140: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

136 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

2.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings, control function instance

Page 141: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1371MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

Figure 3: SCT settings, measurement function instance

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

2.2.2 Configuration with RT

A suitable symbol is selected by using RT. The naming convention for the representa-tions are:

R_CTC<size><alignment> , where:

The representation for a large symbol with down alignment isR_CTCld . Representa-tions are stored in the fileRPU_CTC.PIR.

2.2.3 Configuration with POT

The following table lists process objects created independent of the SCT configura-tion:

Table 1: Representation mnemonics

Mnemonic Function Values Value meaning

<size> Symbol size s Small sized symbol

m Medium sized symbol

l Large symbol

<alignment> Symbol alignment l Left

d Down

r Right

Table 2: Common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

10 Tap position indication

15 End position min.

Page 142: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

138 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

The following table describes process objects created depending on the SCT configu-ration:

16 End position maximum

37 Alarm indication

58 Processing

70 Raise/lower command

73 Emergency off command

100 Internal blocking

101 Selected on another moni-tor

170 Command response forRaise/lower command

173 Command response forEmergency off command

201 Reference voltage indica-tion

Table 3: SCT attributes vs. created process objects

SCT Attribute Selection Index Description

COIL_TYPE Coil in Percent-age

72 Stop command

172 Response stop command

Coil with Steps No objects created

BLOCKING_METHOD Internal in Micro-SCADA

100 Internal blocking

No No objects created

WITH_EXTERNAL_BLOCKING_INDICATION

Yes 60 External update blocking

62 External command blocking

No No objects created

WITH_TARGET_POSITION

Yes 90 Target position command

190 Response target position com-mand

No No objects created

Table 2: Common process objects

Index(IX)

Description

Page 143: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1391MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

2.2.4 Configuration with OPOT

The following process objects are used for generating events.

a) When configured for tap positioning in per cent.b) When configured with Target position dialog box available

3 Tutorial

3.1 The main dialog box

Depending on the configuration, theCoil tap changer in percentsor Coil tapchanger in stepsdialog box is displayed

Figure 4: Coil Tap Changer dialog box variants

Table 4: Created process objects for event recording

Index(IX)

Description

51 Raise/lower command

52a Stop command

53 Emergency off command

54b Target position command

Page 144: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

140 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

The text box displays the transformer secondary output voltage. The current tap posi-tion is indicated by the slider (below the voltage value), and the integer value dis-played above the slider marker.

If the library function is not connected to the process, the operation is simulated in theprocess database.

a) This button is only shown in the Coil Tap Changer in Percents dialog box.

!Note!Clicking theEmergency Offbutton immediately stops the tap changer motor. Thismeans that the tap changer can be positioned between two taps.

3.2 Control confirmation

Changing the tap position requires control confirmation as described in “Control con-firmation” on page 38.

Figure 5: Coil Tap Changer Control Confirmation dialog box

Table 5: Coil tap changer dialog box functions

Button Condition Functionality

Slider increment but-tons Lower/Raise

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Raises or lowers the tap changer positionone step (one per cent) at a time. For eachstep command confirmation is required.

Stop Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Stops the operating coil in a controlled man-ner.a

Emergency Off Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Immediately stops the operating coil.

More - Displays a menu containing several com-mands, some specific for the library func-tion.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 145: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1411MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

3.3 Additional functionality

In addition to the standard dialog boxes described in “Common dialog boxes” onpage 41, the following function specific dialog boxes are available.

3.3.1 Target position in steps dialog box

Use theTarget position in stepsdialog box to set the tap changer to a specific posi-tion. This is a preselection dialog box, as described on page 37.

Figure 6: Target position in steps dialog box

Buttons that would set the tap changer in unavailable positions will be dimmed.

Table 6: Target position dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Position buttons1-30

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the tap changer to the correspondingposition.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 146: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

142 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Tutorial

Coil tap changer

Technical descriptions

3.3.2 Target position in per cent dialog box

Use theTarget position in per cent dialog box to set the tap changer to a fixed per-centage position. This is a preselection dialog box, as described on page 37.

Figure 7: Target position in percent dialog box

Buttons that would set the tap changer in unavailable positions will be dimmed.

Table 7: Target position dialog box functions

Buttons Conditions Functionality

Percentage buttons0-100

Authorizationlevel 1 or higher

Sets the tap changer to the correspondingposition.

Close - Closes the dialog box.

Help - Displays online help for this specific dialogbox.

Page 147: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

143

Introduction

Bay overview

Bay overview

Use the Bay overview library function to indicate a bay or section of a bay in an over-view picture. Function status is indicated by the instance color. Status is indicated forup to three busbars.

Figure 1: Bay overview function instance

1 Introduction

The following functionality is supported:

• Color coded object status display (position, grounded, abnormal).

• Busbar coloring support.

• Integrated online help.

2 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Bay overview library function requires that the base picture and the Station andBay library functions are installed.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 148: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

144 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay overview

Technical descriptions

2.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The Bay overview function instance can be installed in one of three sizes:

• Small, 16x40 pixels.

• Medium, 32x60 pixels.

• Large, 48x100 pixels.

2.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

2.2.1 Preparations

First create a corresponding Bay function instance with the attributeBAY_OVERVIEWset in order to create the necessary process objects.

2.2.2 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

Page 149: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1451MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay overview

Technical descriptions

2.2.3 Configuration with RT

Use RT to select a suitable representation symbol. The available symbols are:

Figure 3: Available symbols

The naming convention for the representation file is:

R_BOV<style><size> where:

A small, square function instance is represented by the fileR_BOVSS, that is, a smallfunction instance.

2.2.4 Connected process objects

For the Bay overview library function to work properly, the connected Bay libraryfunction must contain the following process objects:

Table 1:

Mnemonic

<style> Sets the style of the displayed symbol

Replacement Meaning

C Circle

S Square

D Diamond

<size> Sets the size of the displayed symbol

Replacement Meaning

S Small picture

M Medium sized picture

L Large picture

1 2 3 1 Square

2 Diamond

3 Circle

Table 2: Necessary Bay function process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

30 Bay connected to busbar 1 -

Page 150: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

146 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Bay overview

Technical descriptions

2.3 Object presentation

The function status is indicated by the function instance color. In addition to this thefollowing colors and symbol variants will be used to display certain situations:

a) Depending on connection statusb) In addition to the busbar connection symbol

31 Bay connected to busbar 2 -

32 Bay connected to busbar 3 -

33 Bay grounded -

34 Bay abnormal status For example, a breaker is in an error position

Table 2: Necessary Bay function process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Table 3:

Status Symbol variant

Bay connected to busbar Green, filled symbol

Bay disconnected from busbar Green outlined symbol

Bay error Red filled or outlined sym-bola

At least one device is in intermediate position Green crossed symbol

Error in at least one device Red crossed symbol

No update from process Magenta question mark

Bay is grounded Green earth symbolb

Feeder not grounded No earth symbol displayedb

Page 151: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

147

Installation and configuration

Alarm indicator

Alarm indicator

Use the Alarm indicator library function to monitor input signals and view the signalstatus.

Figure 1: Alarm indicator function instance

1 Installation and configuration

!Note!The Alarm library function requires that the base picture and at least one library func-tion are installed.

1.1 Installation

The installation process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

The size of the Alarm indicator function instance is 16x20 pixels.

1.2 Configuration

The configuration process is generally described in “Installing and configuring” onpage 17.

Technical descriptions

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 152: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

148 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Alarm indicator

Technical descriptions

1.2.1 Configuration with SCT

Figure 2: SCT settings

The attributes are explained in the appendix.

Page 153: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1491MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Alarm indicator

Technical descriptions

1.2.2 Configuration with RT

Use RT to select a suitable representation symbol. The available symbols are:

Figure 3: Available symbols

Each symbol is stored in a corresponding representation file, R_ALIND1,R_ALIND2... etc.

1.3 Object presentation

The function status is indicated by the function instance color.

Page 154: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

150 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation and configuration

Alarm indicator

Technical descriptions

1.4 Installation example

The next figure presents the Alarm indicator picture function as a part of the completebay:

Figure 4: Typical Alarm indicator installation (example)

Page 155: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

151

The appendix

Application engineering information.................................................................155

SCT attributes reference ..................................................................................155

Attributes A-E..............................................................................................155Attributes F-J...............................................................................................159Attributes K-O .............................................................................................159Attributes P-T ..............................................................................................161Attributes U-Z..............................................................................................168Attribute availability .....................................................................................169

Color definitions ...............................................................................................173

Object presentation.....................................................................................173

Installation paths, files and texts ......................................................................174

Logical path names.....................................................................................174Configuration files .......................................................................................175Installation text files.....................................................................................177Miscellaneous files......................................................................................178Menu structure definition.............................................................................178

Run-time files ...................................................................................................179

Dialog boxes ...............................................................................................179Dialog box labels and messages ................................................................182Online help contents ...................................................................................185Miscellaneous text files ...............................................................................187

Forms ...............................................................................................................188

Form labels .................................................................................................188Process object definitions ...........................................................................189Representations..........................................................................................189

Process objects reference................................................................................190

Process object attributes.............................................................................207

Information message reference .......................................................................220

Library function specific messages .............................................................222

Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................231

Scale object ................................................................................................231Event channel .............................................................................................231

Appendix

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 156: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

152 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Appendix

Page 157: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

153

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Application engineering information

This appendix contains additional information common for all library functions butnot needed for normal use or basic understanding, as well as an SCT attribute refer-ence and lists of all available process objects.

Additional information necessary for library function application engineering are alsoincluded. All files needed at run-time, form pictures, help files and other text files arelisted.

1 SCT attributes reference

This chapter contains a complete listing of all available attributes. A definition ofwhich attributes supported by which library function can be found on page 167.

1.1 Attributes A-E

AUXILIARY_PLUG

Check box. To be selected when the switch device is a truck. The process object for anauxiliary plug shows if the control cable from the switch device to the cubicle has beendisconnected, i.e. if the switch device is being fully racked out from the cubicle. In thatcase no switch device symbol is shown in the single-line diagram.

The process object can also be used as an internal tag without the process connection.In that case the user must define the auxiliary plug state when the object state is inter-mediate in the switch device main dialog box.

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

Combo box. Used for selection of the objects authorization group. Maximum groupname length is 63 characters. The group members can be defined later by the usermanager.

AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION

Check box. Used for selection of control method in Transformer voltage control lin-rary function. The feature is not avavailable in simulated process mode.

!Note!If new authorisation groups are added, The MicroSCADA must be restarted, otherwisethe list box contents will not be updated. Create the authorisation groups before instal-lation and configuration of library functions.

Appendix

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 158: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

154 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

BAY_AUTO_RECLOSURE

Check box. To be selected when auto reclosing should be used.

BAY_DISTURBANCE_REC

Check box. To be selected when disturbance recording should be used.

BAY_EVENT_LIST

Check box. To be selected when the bay event list should be used.

BAY_LABEL

Label to be shown in the process picture. The maximum length of the text is 7 charac-ters.

BAY_LN

Combo box. Used for selection of the logical name of the of bay process objects. Thelist box will be empty if no Bay function instance is present in the base picture.

If a bay logical name is selected the attribute BAY_NAME is unavailable.

If NONE is selected from the list box, the attribute BAY_NAME is available and bayname can be selected or inserted.

BAY_NAME

Combo box. Used for selection of bay (feeder) name. Maximum bay name length is 14characters. The list box shows the latest ten entries. The entry will be used as the bayidentifier for corresponding switch devices in event list, alarm list, printout, databasequery, etc. It is very important that the same text is entered for all objects within thesame bay.

Available only if no logical bay name is selected by the attribute BAY_LN (NONEselected from the list box).

BAY_OVERVIEW

Check box. To be selected when the Bay overview library function should be used.

BLOCKING_METHOD

A selector type of a combo box to select the bypass method of the control processobject(s). Normally, the supported blocking methods are:

• No blocking method.

• External in the device; Update and control blocking realized in the device.

• Internal in MicroSCADA; MicroSCADA blocking methods.

• Both (internal and external); Update and control blocking can be realized in the

Page 159: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1551MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

device. For Alarm, Event, Printout and Reprocessing the MicroSCADA blockingmethods are used.

For Measurement, REC supervision, Voltage Control, Coil Tap Changer only Noblocking and Internal in MicroSCADA is selectable.

BYPASS_OPERATION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the bypass operations are enabled or not. Ifthe configurable attributeMOTORIZEDis not selected, this attribute is being disabled,and the value has no meaning.

BYPASS_METHOD

A selector type of a combo box to select the bypass method of the control processobject(s). If the configurable attributeBYPASS_OPERATIONis not selected, thisattribute is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.

The supported bypass methods are:

• Using Qualifier of the Open/Close command using the following table.

• Using own commands. POT creates two additional commands for the bypass oper-ations.

BUSBAR_CONNECTION

The Busbar to where the Bay is connected to, when all switches in the Bay (section)are closed.

CONNECTED_TO_BAY

A selector type of a combo box to select the logical name of the Bay function wherethe Bay Overview function collect it’s information from.

CONTROL_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the control method and the type of the controlprocess object(s). If the configurable attributeMOTORIZEDis not selected, thisattribute is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.

Table 1: Qualifier definition

Qualifierdefinition

Interlocking Synchrocheck

0 YES YES

9 NO YES

10 YES NO

11 NO NO

Page 160: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

156 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

The supported control method are Secured double command with 1 BO (open select/close select/open or close execute/cancel). The secured command uses the select-before-execute method.

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the Switch Device is installed over the bus-bar (compact installation). If SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is not any of Disconnec-tor types, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if no topological busbar coloring is used.

CONNECT_TO_MEAS_LN

The name of the Measurement function instance to which the Phase displacementfunction instance should be connected to.

CONNECT_TO_PF_ID

The name of the Coil Tap Changer picture function to which the Measurement islinked has to be written there. The Coil Tap Changer Measurement can show the posi-tion and the nominal voltage of the coil.

(Measurement Coil Tap Changer)

COIL_TYPE

Combo box. Use COIL_TYPE to select the coil type. Available alternatives are “Per-cent and “Steps”.

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the name (identifier) of theSwitch Device. As a default, the maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The selec-tion list shows up to ten latest entries.

This text will be used as an identifier of the Switch Device on event list, alarm list,printout, database query, etc.

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data acquisition unit of theSwitch Device.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is done by other means thanSigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which connects the signals from theprocess to the communication system, can be defined either by selecting the unit fromthe selection list and editing it or just by entering the type designation.

The maximum length of the text is 10 characters.

Page 161: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1571MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

If there are more than one same type of the data acquisition unit within the bay, it isnecessary to differentiate units by using additional characters. The additional charac-ters should always start with the underscore (_), and then be followed by an unit dis-tinction character ranging from 1 – 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one dataacquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the additional characters can be leftout. The data acquisition unit is described in the fileRPU_DAU.TXT.

DIALOG_WITH_HELP_BUTTON

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the dialog boxes are displayed withhelp button or not.

1.2 Attributes F-J

FOLDER_’number’_TITLE

The name of the Measurement to be shown in the Measurement dialog box. The maxi-mum length of the text is 10 characters. The attribute is optional, if it is not given, theMeasurement is referred to as “Meas. 'number'” in the dialog box.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not configured, this attribute isbeing disabled and the value has no meaning.

GENERAL_INTERROGATION_IN_USE

Use GENERAL_INTERROGATION_IN USE to set the general interrogation functionin use or out of use. If set to “Out of use” theDatabase updateDIALOG box will beunavailable.

INDICATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the position indication processobject(s). The supported data type is double indication (DB).

INTERLOCKING_BYPASS

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the interlock bypass is enabled or not. If theconfigurable attributeBYPASS_OPERATIONis not selected, this attribute is beingdisabled, and the value has no meaning.

1.3 Attributes K-O

LABEL

Free text of 10 character label. Default value is “ “.

LABEL_POSITION

Position of label. Selectable positions are Bottom, Left, Right and Top.

Page 162: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

158 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_LN

Link to the logical name (LN) of an existing object, the Alarm Indicator refer to (‘nr’=1..8). The maximum length of the text is 10 characters.

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_IX

Link to the index (IX) of an existing object, the Alarm Indicator refer to (‘nr’= 1..8).Type integer value (range 1..10000).

MULTIPLE_OPERATOR_PLACE

The attribute is aimed to be used for choice of the operator place. By default theattribute is unavailable. Available when SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLABLE is set.

MOTORIZED

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the Switch Device is motorized andremotely controllable by MicroSCADA.

By selecting the motorized option, the Process Object Tool (POT) will create a set ofprocess objects for control functionalities and all attributes related to control becomescontrollable.

MEAS_’number’_DECIMALS

The number of decimals used when presenting the Measurement value in the dialogbox (the maximum value is 4).

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not configured, this attribute isbeing disabled and the value has no meaning. (*/**)

MIN_POSITION

The minimum position of the Tap Changer. If the tap changer reaches this position nolower commands are possible and a message is displayed.

MAX_POSITION

The maximum position of the Tap Changer. If the tap changer reaches this position noraise commands are possible and a message is displayed.

NOMINAL_VOLTAGE

The nominal voltage of the Coil Tap Changer.

NUMBER_OF_DECIMALS

Format of the process, reference and preselected voltage. One of the following formatsare selectable 0, 0.0, 0.00.

Page 163: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1591MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

!Note!This function is not supported in version 1.5.

OPERATION_COUNTER

A selector type of an editable combo box for Breaker to select the counter type. Thesupported counter types are:

• No operation counter.

• Three phases support (three counters).

• One phase support (one counter).

1.4 Attributes P-T

PARALLEL_INDICATION

Check box. Disabled/enables indication of parallel operation mode in Transformervoltage control.

PRIMARY_POSITION

Direction of the primary winding in the transformer. This attribute has meaning only ifbusbar coloring is used.

PICTURE_FUNCTION_VISIBLE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the picture function is visible or invisi-ble.

In the case picture function is defined as invisible the Station/Remote switch indica-tion is shown in the day/week field of the picture header.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The maximum length of the text is10 characters. Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).

The logical names of process objects have to be unique throughout the entire system,that is, different objects cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is veryimportant to have a proper naming convention for the process object database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the opening time of the maindialog boxes. With the predefined naming convention it is possible to collect all stationand bay related database objects without searching through the complete database.Therefore, it is advised to use the following naming convention:

Page 164: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

160 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

• The first three characters identify the substation.

• The following four characters identify the bay.

• The last three characters can be freely used to identify the source of the signal, i.e.device, unit, etc.

STATION_LN

A selector type of a combo box to select the logical name of the database processobjects from the station. To get an entry in the drop down list, at least one station has tobe installed before. If a station logical name is selected the attributeSTATION_NAMEis dimmed.

If “NONE” is selected, the attributeSTATION_NAMEis active and station name canbe selected or inserted.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the switching device objects on eventlist, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

It is very important that this text is the same for all objects within the same substation.

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the name of the substation.As a default, the maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection list showsup to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process object database, ifthere is any process object linked to the selected bay.

Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning only whenthe process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the bay objects on event list, alarmlist, printout, database query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to allobjects within the same substation.

STATION_LABEL

The abbreviation of the station, which is shown in the single line diagram picture. Themaximum length of the text is 7 characters.

Due to the limited space on the substation single line diagram, this label will be used asan identifier of the common station objects on the screen.

If PICTURE_FUNCTION_VISIBLE is not set, the configurable attribute is beingdisabled, and the value has no meaning.

Page 165: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1611MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

STATION_SR_IN_USE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select, if the Station/Remote-switch is in use,that is, if a physical or a software switch exists.

As a default the Station/Remote switch is in use.

If this selection is set OFF, the control authority is given to everyone whose personalauthorization level is high enough for the control actions. This is gained by setting thestate (value) of the Station/Remote switch permanently to Station and Remote as OVValue = 3 of the double binary. The station Remote process objects must be alwayscreated.

SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

Toggle button. Use SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE to make the operator place(Station/Remote) selection controllable from the process.

By default SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE is not set. The operator place canonly be selected manually.

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the switch device.

The configurable attribute has a great effect since it defines the texts within the data-base and dialog boxes, the functionality and methods on dialog boxes etc. It is alsoused by the event and alarm list when filtering certain types of switch devices.

Types for circuit breakers:

• Circuit breaker

• Circuit breaker with synchrocheck

• Circuit breaker-Disconnector (no full breaking capacity)

Types for disconnectors:

• Disconnector

• Fuse switch

• Load breaking switch

Others:

• Earth switch

• Truck

• Three position switch

Page 166: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

162 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE

Combo box. SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE defines the switch device usage. Theattribute can be used for instance to create search conditions for the alarm or event list.

Available circuit breaker usages:

• Circuit breaker

• Main busbar circuit breaker

• Main busbar A circuit breaker

• Main busbar B circuit breaker

• Reserve busbar circuit breaker

• Bypass circuit breaker

• Bus-section circuit breaker

• Bus-coupler circuit breaker

Available disconnector usages:

• Disconnector

• Main busbar disconnector

• Main busbar A disconnector

• Main busbar B disconnector

• Reserve busbar disconnector

• Bypass disconnector

• Line disconnector

• Line disconnector A

• Line disconnector B

• Bus-section disconnector

• Bus-section A disconnector

• Bus-section B disconnector

• Bus-section C disconnector

• Bus-coupler disconnector

Available earth switch usages:

Page 167: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1631MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

• Earth switch

• Main busbar earth switch

• Main busbar A earth switch

• Main busbar B earth switch

• Reserve busbar earth switch

• By-pass earth switch

• Line earth switch

• Line earth switch A

• Line earth switch B

• CT-section earth switch

Other available alternatives:

• Truck

• Three-position switch

SWITCH_SECTION

Combo box. Use SWITCH_SECTION to set the truck’s switch section. The attributeis not available if the switch device is other than a truck.

The attribute is used by the busbar coloring algorithm to identify and combine functioninstances. When a circuit breaker is combined with two truck instances, setSWITCH_SECTION to “First Section” for one truck, and to “Second Section” for theother. It does not matter which truck is defined to with value as long as the same valueis not used for both trucks.

The attribute does not need to be set for single sided function instances.

STATION_TYPE

Combo box. Use STATION_TYPE to set the data acquisition unit communication pro-tocol.

If a REx 5xx device (for example REC 580) with LON communication is usedSTATION_TYPE should be set to LON (LAG 1.3).

SYNCHROCHECK_BYPASS

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the synchrocheck bypass enabled or not. Ifthe configurable attributeBYPASS_OPERATIONis not selected and theSWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPEis not “Circuit Breaker with Synchrocheck”, thisattribute will be disabled and the value has no meaning.

Page 168: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

164 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_BAR a

Check box. Use SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_BAR to display the measurement as abar (check box selected). Available only if SHOW_MEAS_’number’ is selected. Una-vailable if a the attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is set to pulse counter measurement.

SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT a

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Measurements unit is shown. Theunit is read from the database. Available only if SHOW_MEAS_’number’ is selected.

SUBSTITUTE_POSITION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select if the substitution of the switch device posi-tion is possible.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the control dialog boxes can beopened.

SHOW_MEAS_’number’ b

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the state of the Measurement is to beshown as a default when the picture is opened.

Available only if SHOW_MEAS_’number’ is selected. Unavailable if a the attributeTYPE_MEAS_’number’ is set to pulse counter measurement.

SUPERVISION_DEVICE

The choice of the SUPERVISION_DEVICE determine the texts, which will be shownin the folders of the main dialog box and signal state dialog box. Max 12 Charactersare allowed. Selection which device should be supervised. This text attribute is edit-able and is responsible for the used OX Texts of predefined creation of process objectsaccording Table 7.With this selection the concerning Object texts are chosen for theinstallation process.

It is obligatory to use the following naming convention, that means start with thebelow shown letters (capital letters) xxx can be changed according to your need (max.12 characters):

a) Configurable attribute exists only for the Measurement with a horisontal field.b) Configurable attribute exists for the Measurement with both a horisontal and vertical field.

Page 169: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1651MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

• REC xxx

• REL xxx

• RET xxx

• REF xxx

• Not defined

Not defined means other devices (names) then creates a certain set of process object.

SET_CHARACTERISTIC_DIALOG_VISIBLE

This check box enables the “Set Characteristic” dialog box under the “More” button. Ifthis option is set, process objects for controlling the characteristic of the Voltage Con-trol are added.

SET_REF_VOLTAGE_DIALOG_VISIBLE

This check box enables the dialog box “Set Reference Voltage” under the “More” but-ton. If this option is set, process objects for controlling the reference voltage of thevoltage control are added.

SR_SWITCH_INDEPENDENT_FROM_BAY

If the check box is set, the Transformer voltage control library function displays theirown local/station/remote switch and gets the possibility to switch the device to stationand remote independent of the station or bay function instance settings.

TYPE_MEAS_’number’

The type of the Measurement. The type identifies the Measurement for the creation ofdatabase (indexes, object texts, units..). In case no suitable alternative can be found,the indexes 200..210 can be used. The indexes 200..209 are for user-defined analog(AI) objects and the indexes 210..219 are for user-defined pulse counter (PC) objects.

TARGET_POSITION_DIALOG_VISIBLE

This check box enables the dialog box “Target position” under the “More” button. Ifthis option is set, process objects for this dialog box are added.

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

Selection for 2-winding or 3-winding transformer.

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_NR

The color of the primary side of the busbar. This attribute is used by the busbar color-ing.

TOPO_OBJECT1_COLOR_NR

The color of the secondary side of the busbar. This attribute is used by the busbarcoloring. Only available when 2-winding transformer is selected.

Page 170: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

166 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

TOPO_OBJECT2_COLOR_NR

The color of the secondary side of the busbar. This attribute is used by the busbarcoloring. This attribute is available when 3-winding transformer is selected.

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_HIGH_LN

P_OBJECT_LN attribute of the line segment connected to the primary winding.

TAP_POSITION_INDICATION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Coil Tap Changer Measurementshows the coil position.

1.5 Attributes U-Z

UNIT_OF_VOLTAGES

Unit of the process, reference and preselected voltage. One of the following units isselectable “”, “V”, “kV”.

VOLTAGE_INDICATION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Coil Tap Changer Measurementshows the voltage.

WITH_EDIT_LIMITS

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether theEdit Limit dialog box can beopened for the Measurement.

WITH_DEADBAND_SETTINGS

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Zero Deadband Setting dialogbox can be opened for the Measurement.

WITH_FAST_TRENDING

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Fast Trending dialog box can beopened for the Measurement.

WITH_EXTERNAL_BLOCKING_INDICATION

An check box to select whether external update and control blocking are available ornot.

WITH_TARGET_POSITION

An ON/OFF type of check box to select whether the Target Position dialog box can beopened for the Coil Tap Changer.

Page 171: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1671MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

1.6 Attribute availability

Table 2:

Attribute Availability

STATION_LN � � � � �

PICTURE_FUNCTION_VISIBLE

STATION_NAME � � � � � � �

STATION_LABEL �

STATION_SR_IN_USE �

SR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

� �

MULTIPLE_OPERATOR_PLACE� �

BAY_NAME � � � � � �

BAY_LABEL �

BAY_AUTO_RECLOSURE �

BAY_DISTURBANCE_REC �

BAY_OVERVIEW �

BAY_EVENT_LIST �

DEVICE_NAME � � � � �

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE �

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE

SWITCH_SECTION �

STATION_TYPE � � � � � � �

INDICATION_TYPE �

BLOCKING_METHOD � � � � � � �

MOTORIZED �

BYPASS_OPERATION �

INTERLOCKING_BYPASS �

SYNCHROCHECK_BYPASS �

Sta

tion

Bay

Sw

itch

devi

ceM

easu

rem

ent

Bay

over

v iew

RE

x5x

xsu

perv

isio

n

Ala

rmin

dica

tion

Tran

sf. v

olta

geco

ntro

l

Coi

l tap

chan

ger

Pha

sedi

spla

cem

ent

Page 172: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

168 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

BYPASS_METHOD �

CONTROL_TYPE �

SUBSTITUTE_POSITION �

OPERATION_COUNTER �

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT � � � � � � �

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP � � � � � � �

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON � � � �

DIALOG_WITH_HELP_BUTTON� � � � � � �

AUXILIARY_PLUG �

COMPACT_INSTALLATION �

GENERAL_INTERROGATION_IN_USE

P_OBJECT_LN � � � � � � �

BAY_LN � � � �

SUPERVISION_DEVICE �

LABEL �

LABEL_POSITION �

MAX_POSITION � �

MIN_POSITION � �

UNIT_OF_VOLTAGES �

NUMBER_OF_DECIMALS �

SR_SWITCH_INDEPENDENT_FROM_BAY

TARGET_POSITION_DIALOG_VISIBLE

SET_REF_VOLTAGE_DIALOG_VISIBLE

NOMINAL_VOLTAGE � �

SET_CHARACTERISTIC_DIALOG_VISIBLE

Table 2:

Attribute Availability

Sta

tion

Bay

Sw

itch

devi

ceM

easu

rem

ent

Bay

over

v iew

RE

x5x

xsu

perv

isio

n

Ala

rmin

dica

tion

Tran

sf. v

olta

geco

ntro

l

Coi

l tap

chan

ger

Pha

sedi

spla

cem

ent

Page 173: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1691MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

WITH_EXTERNAL_BLOCKING_INDICATION

� �

TRANSFORMER_TYPE �

PRIMARY_POSITION �

AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION �

PARALLEL_INDICATION �

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_NR �

TOPO_OBJECT1_COLOR_NR �

TOPO_OBJECT2_COLOR_NR �

WITH_EDIT_SETTINGS �

WITH_DEADBAND_LIMITS �

WITH_FAST_TRENDING �

CONNECTED_TO_BAY_LN �

BUSBAR_CONNECTION �

LINK_SIGNAL1_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL2_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL3_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL4_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL5_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL6_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL7_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL8_TO_LN �

LINK_SIGNAL1_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL2_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL3_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL4_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL5_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL6_TO_IX �

LINK_SIGNAL7_TO_IX �

Table 2:

Attribute Availability

Sta

tion

Bay

Sw

itch

devi

ceM

easu

rem

ent

Bay

over

v iew

RE

x5x

xsu

perv

isio

n

Ala

rmin

dica

tion

Tran

sf. v

olta

geco

ntro

l

Coi

l tap

chan

ger

Pha

sedi

spla

cem

ent

Page 174: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

170 1MRK 511 064-UEN

SCT attributes reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

LINK_SIGNAL8_TO_IX �

COIL_TYPE �

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_HIGH_LN

� �

WITH_TARGET_POSITION �

TAP_POSITION_INDICATION �

VOLTAGE_INDICATION �

CONNECT_TO_PF_ID �

CONNECT_TO_MEAS_LN �

TYPE_MEAS_1 �

TYPE_MEAS_2 �

TYPE_MEAS_3 �

TYPE_MEAS_4 �

FOLDER_1_TITLE �

FOLDER_2_TITLE �

FOLDER_3_TITLE �

FOLDER_4_TITLE �

MEAS_1_DECIMALS �

MEAS_2_DECIMALS �

MEAS_3_DECIMALS �

MEAS_4_DECIMALS �

SHOW_MEAS_1 �

SHOW_MEAS_2 �

SHOW_MEAS_3 �

SHOW_MEAS_4 �

SHOW_MEAS_1_AS_BAR �

SHOW_MEAS_2_AS_BAR �

SHOW_MEAS_3_AS_BAR �

SHOW_MEAS_4_AS_BAR �

Table 2:

Attribute Availability

Sta

tion

Bay

Sw

itch

devi

ceM

easu

rem

ent

Bay

over

v iew

RE

x5x

xsu

perv

isio

n

Ala

rmin

dica

tion

Tran

sf. v

olta

geco

ntro

l

Coi

l tap

chan

ger

Pha

sedi

spla

cem

ent

Page 175: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1711MRK 511 064-UEN

Color definitions

Application engineering information

Appendix

2 Color definitions

2.1 Object presentation

The following table shows the conditions for coloring.

SHOW_MEAS_1_UNIT �

SHOW_MEAS_2_UNIT �

SHOW_MEAS_3_UNIT �

SHOW_MEAS_4_UNIT �

Table 2:

Attribute Availability

Sta

tion

Bay

Sw

itch

devi

ceM

easu

rem

ent

Bay

over

v iew

RE

x5x

xsu

perv

isio

n

Ala

rmin

dica

tion

Tran

sf. v

olta

geco

ntro

l

Coi

l tap

chan

ger

Pha

sedi

spla

cem

ent

Table 3:

Color Colordefinition

RGB value

White (“M”,27) (100,100,100)

Magenta (“M”,30) (100,0,100)

Red (“M”,16) (89,10,10)

Yellow (“M”,17) (89,100,0)

Cyan (“M”,29) (0,100,100)

Brown (“M”,28) (40,30,20)

Green (“M”,32) (10,45,10)

Black (“M”,14) (0,0,0)

Table 4: Selectors for representations with conditions

Condition Color Description

- Green Normal state

OS=3 Green Not synchronized

Page 176: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

172 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation paths, files and texts

Application engineering information

Appendix

3 Installation paths, files and texts

3.1 Logical path names

The library functions references directories using logical path names defined in the file[drive]:\SC\LIB4\BBONE\USE\PATH4_R1.TXT .

The following logical path names are available:

a) n is a number expressing the used language. NormallyLang0 is used, where 0 means english.

IU=-1 Magenta Index missing

OS=10 Magenta Not sampled

OS=2,4..9 Magenta Obsolete

SB=1 Cyan Substituted

OS=1 Magenta Invalid value

UB=1 or BL=1 Magenta Update blocked

AZ=1, 2 Red Alarm

SS<2 or UN=0 Cyan Manually entered (no process connec-tion)

AZ=3, 4 Yellow Warning

AB=1 or HB=1 or PB=1or XB=1

Yellow Alarm blocked

History blocked

Printout blocked

Reprocessing blocked

AR=1 Blinking Alarm unacknowledged

AR=1 and AL=1 Blinking stops Alarm acknowledged

UB=1 Brown Binary output process objects

Table 4: Selectors for representations with conditions

Condition Color Description

Table 5: Library specific logical paths

Logical path Actual path

R_INST \LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\INST

R_USE \LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\USE

R_LANG \LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\LANGna

Page 177: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1731MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation paths, files and texts

Application engineering information

Appendix

Some general logical paths are stored in the file[drive]:\SC\LIB4\BBONE\USE\PATH4_B1.TXT :

3.2 Configuration files

This chapter gives lists of file names for files relevant for the configuration of a func-tion, such as instance. type and data files.All files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\INST .

Table 6: General logical paths

Logical path Actual path

B_INST \LIB4\BASE\BBONE\INST

B_USE \LIB4\BASED\BBONE\USE

Table 7: Function instance symbols

File Symbol

RPI_STAMI.PIC Station

RPI_BAYMI.PIC Bay

RPI_SBRSI.PIC Breaker, small symbol

RPI_SBRMI.PIC Breaker, medium symbol

RPI_SBRLI.PIC Breaker, large symbol

RPI_STRSI.PIC Truck, small symbol

RPI_STRMI.PIC Truck, medium symbol

RPI_STRLI.PIC Truck, large symbol

RPI_SDCSI.PIC Disconnector, small symbol

RPI_SDCMI.PIC Disconnector, medium symbol

RPI_SDCLI.PIC Disconnector, large symbol

RPI_SESSI.PIC Earth switch, small symbol

RPI_SESMI.PIC Earth switch, medium symbol

RPI_SESLI.PIC Earth switch, large symbol

RPI_S3PSI.PIC Three position switch, small symbol

RPI_S3PMI.PIC Three position switch, medium symbol

RPI_S3PLI.PIC Three position switch, large symbol

RPI_MEHSI.PIC Measurement, small horisontal symbol with measurementdisplay

RPI_MEHMI.PIC Measurement, medium sized horizontal symbol with meas-urement display

RPI_MEHLI.PIC Measurement, large horizontal symbol with measurementdisplay

RPI_MEVSI.PIC Measurement, small vertical symbol with measurement dis-play

Page 178: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

174 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation paths, files and texts

Application engineering information

Appendix

Type function files contain program code common no matter how many instances of alibrary function are installed in a station picture.

RPI_MEVMI.PIC Measurement, medium sized vertical symbol with measure-ment display

RPI_MEVLI.PIC Measurement, large vertical symbol with measurement dis-play

RPI_MESSI.PIC Measurement, small symbol

RPI_MESMI.PIC Measurement, medium symbol

RPI_MESLI.PIC Measurement, large symbol

RPI_PHDS.PIC Phase displacement, small symbol

RPI_PHDM.PIC Phase displacement, medium symbol

RPI_PHDL.PIC Phase displacement, large symbol

RPI_SUPSI.PIC REx 5xx supervision, small symbol

RPI_SUPMI.PIC REx 5xx supervision, medium symbol

RPI_SUPLI.PIC REx 5xx supervision, large symbol

RPI_TRAVI.PIC Voltage control, very small symbol

RPI_TRASI.PIC Voltage control, small symbol

RPI_TRAMI.PIC Voltage control, medium symbol

RPI_TRALI.PIC Voltage control, large symbol

RPI_TRMMI.PIC Voltage control, measurement instance

RPI_CTCSI.PIC Coil tap changer, small symbol

RPI_CTCMI.PIC Coil tap changer, medium symbol

RPI_CTCLI.PIC Coil tap changer, large symbol

RPI_CTM.PIC Coil tap changer, measurement instance

RPI_AINSI.PIC Alarm indicator

RPI_BOVSI.PIC Bay overview, small symbol

RPI_BOVMI.PIC Bay overview, medium symbol

RPI_BOVLI.PIC Bay overview, large symbol

Table 8: Type functions

File Function

RPI_STAT.PIC Station

RPI_BAYT.PIC Bay

RPI_SWDT.PIC Switch device

RPI_MEAT.PIC Measurement

RPI_SUPT.PIC REx 5xx supervision

RPI_TRAT.PIC Voltage control

Table 7: Function instance symbols

Page 179: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1751MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation paths, files and texts

Application engineering information

Appendix

Configuration files contains library function data used by SCT during configuration.

3.3 Installation text files

These files contains texts and messages used during process database creation. Allfiles are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\LANG0 .

RPI_TRMT.PIC Voltage control, measurement instance

RPI_CTCT.PIC Coil tap changer

RPI_BOVT.PIC Bay overview

RPI_AINT.PIC Alarm indicator

Table 9: SCT configuration data

File Function

RPI_STA.DAT Station

RPI_BAY.DAT Bay

RPI_SBR.DAT Breaker

RPI_STR.DAT Truck

RPI_SDC.DAT Disconnector

RPI_SES.DAT Earth switch

RPI_S3P.DAT Three position switch

RPI_MEH.DAT Measurement, horisontal symbol with measurement display

RPI_MEV.DAT Measurement, vertical symbol with measurement display

RPI_MES.DAT Measurement

RPI_PHD.DAT Phase displacement

RPI_SUP.DAT REx 5xx supervision

RPI_TRA.DAT Voltage control

RPI_TRM.DAT Voltage control, measurement instance

RPI_CTC.DAT Coil tap changer

RPI_CTM.DAT Coil tap changer, measurement instance

RPI_BOV.DAT Bay overview

RPI_AIN.DAT Alarm indicator

Table 8: Type functions

Table 10: Installation text files

Text File Related to

RPI_STA.TXT Station

RPI_BAY.TXT Bay

RPI_SWD.TXT Database creation

Page 180: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

176 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Installation paths, files and texts

Application engineering information

Appendix

3.4 Miscellaneous files

All files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\INST .

3.5 Menu structure definition

All library functions appearing in the SCT have a corresponding index file, definingthe structure of the selection list. All files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\BASE\BBONE\INST .

RPI_MEAS.TXT Measurement

RPI_SUP1.TXT Supervision object (index) REC XXX

RPI_SUP2.TXT Supervision object (index) REL XXX

RPI_SUP3.TXT Supervision object (index) RET XXX

RPI_SUP4.TXT Supervision object (index) REF XXX

RPI_SUP5.TXT Supervision object (index) not defined

RPI_TRA.TXT Voltage control

RPI_TRM.TXT Voltage control

RPI_CTC.TXT Coil tap changer

Table 10: Installation text files

Table 11: Installation text files

Text File Related to

PF_POT_OP.VSO -

RPI_IBAYS.TXT Installed bays search

Table 12:

Index File Function

INDEX4_R1.TXT Station

INDEX4_R2.TXT Bay

INDEX4_R3.TXT Switch device

INDEX4_R4.TXT REx 5xx supervision

INDEX4_R5.TXT Phase displacement

INDEX4_R7.TXT Voltage control

INDEX4_R6.TXT Coil tap changer

INDEX4_R8.TXT Bay overview

INDEX4_R9.TXT Alarm indicator

Page 181: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1771MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

4 Run-time files

4.1 Dialog boxes

All dialog boxes are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROC-ESS\USE.

Table 13: Station dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_STAA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_STAB.PIC Control confirmation

RPU_STAC.PIC Update process data

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state drop list

RPU_STAH.PIC Remote blockings

Table 14: Bay dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_BAYA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_BAYC.PIC Auto reclosure

RPU_BAYF.PIC External blockings

RPU_BAYG.PIC Disturbance recorder

RPU_BAYH.PIC Event list

RPU_BAYI.PIC Control confirmation

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state drop-down list box

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.PIC Object messages

Table 15: Switch device dialog boxes

File Dialog Bbox

RPU_SWDA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_SWDB.PIC Control confirmation

RPU_SWDC.PIC Operation countings

Page 182: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

178 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_SWDD.PIC External blockings

RPU_SWDE.PIC Forced operation

RPU_SWDF.PIC Substitute position

RPU_SWDG.PIC Position simulation

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_SWDQ.PIC Auxiliary plug

RPU_SWDR.PIC Counter settings

Table 16: Measurement dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_MEA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_MEB.PIC Edit limits

RPU_MEC.PIC Zero deadband setting

RPU_MED.PIC Fast trending (small window)

RPU_MEE.PIC Fast trending (dialog box)

RPU_MEF.PIC Fast trending settings

RPU_MEG.PIC Settings

RPU_MEH.PIC Settings

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state (drop-down list box)

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

Table 15: Switch device dialog boxes

File Dialog Bbox

Page 183: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1791MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 17: REx 5xx supervision dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_SUPA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_SUPC.PIC Signal state

RPU_SUPD.PIC Device information

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state (drop-down list box)

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

Table 18: Coil tap changer dialog boexs

Picture Functionality

RPU_CTCA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_CTCB.PIC Target position in steps

RPU_CTCC.PIC Target position in per cent

RPU_CTCD.PIC Control confirmation

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state (drop-down list box)

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

Table 19: Voltage control dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_TRAA.PIC Main dialog box

RPU_TRAB.PIC Control confirmation

RPU_TRAC.PIC Set characteristic

RPU_TRAD.PIC Active simulation

RPU_TRAF.PIC Set reference voltage

RPU_TRAG.PIC Target position

RPU_ALST.PIC Alarm state

RPU_ALDL.PIC Alarm state (drop-down list box)

RPU_BLKI.PIC Internal blockings

Page 184: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

180 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

4.2 Dialog box labels and messages

To simplify localization, all labels and messages are stored separated from the Dialogbox graphic elements. These text files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\LANG0 (english).

RPU_OMSG.PIC Active object messages

Table 19: Voltage control dialog boxes

File Dialog box

Table 20: Station dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_STAA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_STAB.TXT Control confirmation

RPU_STAC.TXT Update process data

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.TXT Active object messages

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_STAH.TXT Remote blockings

RPU_PROMSG.TXT Common object messages

Table 21: Bay dialog box labels and messages

File Functionality

RPU_BAYA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_BAYC.TXT Auto reclosure

RPU_BAYF.TXT External blockings

RPU_BAYG.TXT Disturbance recorder

RPU_BAYH.TXT Event list

RPU_BAYI.TXT Control confirmation

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.TXT Common object messages

Page 185: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1811MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 22: Switch device dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_SWDA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_SWDB.TXT Control confirmation

RPU_SWDC.TXT Operation counting

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_SWDD.TXT External blockings

RPU_SWDE.TXT Forced operation

RPU_SWDF.TXT Substitute position

RPU_SWDG.TXT Position simulation

RPU_OMSG.TXT Active object messages

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_SWDQ.TXT Auxiliary plug

RPU_SWDR.TXT Counter setting

RPU_PROMSG.TXT Common object messages

Table 23: Measurement dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_MEA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_MEB.TXT Edit limits

RPU_MEC.TXT Zero deadband setting

RPU_MED.TXT Fast trending (small window)

RPU_MEE.TXT Fast trending (dialog box)

RPU_MEF.TXT Fast trending settings

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_OMSG.TXT Active object messages

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_PROMSG.TXT Common object messages

Page 186: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

182 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 24: REx 5xx supervision dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_SUPA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_SUPC.TXT Signal state

RPU_SUPD.TXT Device information

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_OMSG.TXT Common object messages

Table 25: Voltage control dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_TRAA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_TRAB.TXT Control confirmation

RPU_TRAC.TXT Set characteristic

RPU_TRAD.TXT Active simulation

RPU_TRAF.TXT Set reference voltage

RPU_TRAG.TXT Target position

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_OMSG.TXT Active object messages

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_PROMSG.TXT Common object messages

Table 26: Coil tap changer dialog box labels and messages

File Dialog box

RPU_CTCA.TXT Main dialog box

RPU_CTCB.TXT Target position in steps

RPU_CTCC.TXT Target position in percent

RPU_ALST.TXT Alarm state

RPU_OMSG.TXT Active object messages

RPU_BLKI.TXT Internal blockings

RPU_PROMSG.TXT Common object messages

Page 187: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1831MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

4.3 Online help contents

To simplify localization, all online help text are stored separated from the dialog boxgraphic elements.These text files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\LANG0.

Table 27: Installation online help

File Dialog box

RPI_STA.HLP Station

RPI_BAY.HLP Bay

RPI_BOV.HLP Bay overview

RPI_AIN.HLP Alarm indicator

RPI_SWD.HLP Switch device

RPI_PHD.HLP Phase displacement

RPI_MEAS.HLP Measurement

RPI_SUP.HLP REx 5xx supervision

RPI_TRA.HLP Voltage control (control instance)

RPI_TRM.HLP Voltage control (measurement instance)

RPI_CTC.HLP Coil tap changer (control instance)

RPI_CTM.HLP Coil tap changer (measurement instance)

Table 28: Online help for common dialog boxes

File Dialog box

RPU_OMSG.HLP Active object messages

Table 29: Station online help

File Dialog box

RPU_STAA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_STAC.HLP Update process data

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

RPU_OMSG.HLP Active object messages

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_STAH.HLP Remote blockings

Page 188: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

184 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 30: Bay online help

File Dialog box

RPU_BAYA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_BAYC.HLP Auto reclosure

RPU_BAYF.HLP External blockings

RPU_BAYG.HLP Disturbance recorder

RPU_BAYH.HLP Event list

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

Table 31: Switch device online help

File Dialog box

RPU_SWDA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_SWDC.HLP Operation countings

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

RPU_SWDD.HLP External blockings

RPU_SWDE.HLP Forced operation

RPU_SWDF.HLP Substitute position

RPU_SWDG.HLP Position simulation

RPU_OMSG.HLP Active object messages

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_SWDQ.HLP Auxiliary plug

RPU_SWDR.HLP Counter settings

Table 32: Measurement online help

File Dialog box

RPU_MEA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_MEB.HLP Edit limits

RPU_MEC.HLP Zero deadband setting

RPU_MEE.HLP Fast trending (dialog box)

RPU_MEF.HLP Fast trending (settings)

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

Page 189: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1851MRK 511 064-UEN

Run-time files

Application engineering information

Appendix

4.4 Miscellaneous text files

Text files used when process objects are created are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\INST

Table 33: REx 5xx supervision online help

File Dialog box

RPU_SUPA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

RPUI_SUPC.HLP Signal state

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

Table 34: Voltage control online help

File Dialog box

RPU_TRAA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_TRAB.HLP Control confirmation

RPU_TRAC.HLP Set characteristic

RPU_TRAD.HLP Active simulation

RPU_TRAF.HLP Set reference voltage

RPU_TRAG.HLP Target position

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

Table 35: Coil tap changer online help

File Dialog box

RPU_CTCA.HLP Main dialog box

RPU_CTCB.HLP Target position in steps

RPU_CTCC.HLP Target position in percent

RPU_ALST.HLP Alarm state

RPU_BLKI.HLP Internal blockings

Table 36: Data acquisition units selection list

File Contents

RPI_DAU.TXT Available data acquisition units.

Page 190: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

186 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Forms

Application engineering information

Appendix

SCIL routines run from dialog boxes (for instance, when theOK button is pressed) arestored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\USE .

5 Forms

Forms are used for printouts and are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\USE .

5.1 Form labels

To simplify localization, all labels and messages are stored separated from the dialogbox graphic elements. These text files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\LANG0 (english).

Table 37: SCIL routines for dialog boxes

File Routine

RPU_AUTH.TXT Authority check. Run from main dialog boxes.

RPU_UPDATE.TXT Update process objects when they are deblocked. This codeis run by the command procedure RPU_UPDATE.

RPU_CMDEXE.TXT Command handling (LON).

RPU_CMDSEL.TXT Select command.

RPU_CMDCAN.TXT Cancel command.

RPU_CMDEXE.TXT Execute command.

RPU_FT_SET.TXT Default settings for all fast trending windows.

RPU_FTNEW.TXT Run when a new fast trending window is opened.

RPU_FTOPEN.TXT Fast trend display check when a process picture is opened.

Table 38: Forms

File Form

FORM4RBI1.PIC Single indication (BI) signal printouts.

FORM4RBO1.PIC Status text handling binary output (BO) type of signals.

FORM4RDB1.PIC Status text handling double indication (DB) type of signals.

FORM4RAI1.PIC Status text handling analog input (AI) type of signals.

FORM4RAI2.PIC Analog input (AI) signal printouts.

FORM4RAO1.PIC Analog output (AO) signal printouts.

FORM4RAO2.PIC Analog output (AO) signal printouts.

FORM4R_SER.PIC Status text indication for bay event list.

FORM4RDO1.PIC Digital output (DO) signal printouts.

Page 191: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1871MRK 511 064-UEN

Forms

Application engineering information

Appendix

5.2 Process object definitions

Process objects are defined in files stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\INST .

5.3 Representations

Representation files are stored in the directory[drive]:\LIB4\RMOD\PROCESS\USE .

Table 39: Form labels

File Form

FORM4RBO1.TXT Binary output (BO)

FORM4RDB1.TXT Double indication (DB)

FORM4RAI1.TXT Analog input (AI) printouts

FORM4RAI2.TXT Analog input (AI) printouts

FORM4RAO1.TXT Analog output (AO) printouts

FORM4R_SER.TXT Status text indication for bay event list.

FORM4RDO1.TXT Digital output (DO) printouts.

Table 40: Process object definitions

File Library function

RPI_STA.POT Station

RPI_BAY.POT Bay (POT)

RPI_BAY.OPT Bay (OPOT)

RPI_SWD.POT Switch device (POT)

RPI_SWD.OPT Switch device (OPOT)

RPI_MEA.POT Measurement

RPI_SUP.POT REx 5xx supervision

RPI_TRA.POT Voltage control (POT)

RPI_TRA.OPT Voltage control (OPOT)

RPI_CTC.POT Coil tap changer (POT)

RPI_CTC.OPT Coil tap changer (OPOT)

Table 41: Representations

File Library function

RPU_SWD.PIR Switch device

Page 192: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

188 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

6 Process objects reference

This section contains a complete listing of all available process objects and mostimportant attributes, listed for each library function except for Switch device, whereprocess objects are listed for each available type of device. The following abbrevia-tions are used:

RPU_SUP.PIR REx 5xx supervision

RPU_MEAS.PIR Measurement

RPU_TRA.PIR Voltage control

RPU_CTC.PIR Coil tap changer

RPU_AIN.PIR Alarm indicator

RPU_BOV.PIR Bay overview

Table 41: Representations

OX Object description, max. 30 characters

IX Index

PT Process object type

DX Directive text

PF Picture format

RI Reserved integer

E/A/N Event, alarm, none

RX Reserved text (character 10-30 only)

Table 42: Station process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10a Station/Remote switch indi-cation

The Station/Remote switch indication is usedfor checking the station authority of the substa-tion.

30 Start of General interroga-tion

Indication of general interrogation start to allconnected devices within the station.

31 End of General interroga-tion

Indication of general interrogation ending.

70 Station/Remote switch toLocal command

The Station/Remote switch to Local commandobject is an output object which is used for set-ting the station authority in the control device toLocal.

Page 193: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1891MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

a) Always created

71 Station/Remote switch to

Station command

The Station / Remote switch to Station com-mand object is an output object which is usedfor setting the station authority in the controldevice to Station.

72 Station/Remote switch toRemote command

The Station / Remote switch to Remote com-mand object is an output object which is usedfor setting the station authority in the controldevice to Remote.

73 Station/Remote switch to

Station and Remote com-mand

The Station / Remote switch to Station andRemote command object is an output objectwhich is used for setting the station authority inthe control device to Out of Use.

100 Station blocking Internal station blocking indication.

101a Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows if the station is beingselected on another monitor(s).

170 Actcon/actterm Command response for operator place Localcommand.

171 Actcon/actterm Command response for operator place Stationcommand.

172 Actcon/actterm Command response for operator place Remotecommand.

173 Actcon/actterm Command response for operator place Stationand Remote command.

Table 43: Bay process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10a Operator place Off Position indication for operator place to Off, cal-culated value.

11a Operator place Local Position indication for operator place to Local,calculated value.

12a Operator place Station Position indication for operator place to Station,calculated value.

13a Operator place Remote Position indication for operator place toRemote, calculated value.

15a Local/Remote switch indi-cation valid

Position for Local/Remote switch in the deviceis valid.

Table 42: Station process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 194: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

190 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

30 Bay connected to busbar 1 Indication for connection to busbar 1 (for bayoverview function).

31 Bay connected to busbar 2 Indication for connection to busbar 2 (for bayoverview function).

32 Bay connected to busbar 3 Indication for connection to busbar 3 (for bayoverview function).

33 Bay grounded Indication for Bay grounded (for bay overviewfunction).

34a Bay abnormal status Indication for Bay abnormal status.

35a Bay reserved Indication for Bay reserved.

60 Signal blocking Indication for signal blocking/deblocking exter-nal in device.

61 Measurement blocking Indication for measurement blocking/deblock-ing external in device.

62 Command blocking Indication for command blocking/deblockingexternal in device.

63 Remote blocking Indication for remote blocking.

65 Disturbance recorder Indication for disturbance recorder In use/ Offuse.

66 Auto reclosing In use/Offuse

Indication for Auto reclosing In use/ Off use.

67 Auto reclosing in progress Indication for Auto reclosing in progress.

72 Set operator place to sta-tion command

Command used for setting operator place toStation.

73 Set operator place toremote command

Command used for setting operator place toRemote.

74 Set operator place to sta-tion and remote command

Command used for setting operator place toStation and Remote.

80 Signal blocking command Send a signal blocking/deblocking to the con-trol unit.

81 Measurement blockingcommand

Send a measurement blocking/deblocking tothe control unit.

82 Command blocking Send a command blocking/deblocking to thecontrol unit.

83 Remote blocking command Send a command remote blocking/deblockingto the control unit.

85 Disturbance recorder On/Off command

Command to set the disturbance recorder Inuse/ Off use.

86 Auto reclosing In use/Offuse command

Command to set Auto reclosing function In use/Off use.

100 Blocking Internal Bay blocking indication.

Table 43: Bay process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 195: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1911MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

a) Always created (common process objects)

101a Bay selected on anothermonitor

An internal tag that indicates if the bay isselected on another monitor(s).

172 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for operatorplace to Station.

173 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for operatorplace to Remote.

174 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for operatorplace to Station and Remote.

180 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for Signalblocking.

181 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for Measure-ment blocking.

182 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for Commandblocking.

183 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for CommandRemote blocking.

185 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for Distur-bance recorder function.

186 Actcon/actterm Command termination response for Autoreclosing function.

Table 44: Breaker process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Position indication Used for Position indication of the SwitchDevice state (only representation):

- Open / - Closed / - Intermediate / - Faulty.

15 Interlocked

indication

Receives a control blocking signal for the openor close command from the control unit andprevents the open/close command in the singleline diagram.

16 Position error

indication

Event recording for the alarm- and event list,set if IV=1, intermediate position after elapse oftime position or faulty position (open and close= 1 signal).

18 Control block process External control blocking from the process

Table 43: Bay process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 196: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

192 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

20 Position indication Used for event recording (no influence to therepresentation).

30 Auxiliary Plug state An internal or external tag to indicate if theswitch device is being fully racked out fromcubicle and therefore, it should not be shown inthe single line diagram.

36 Synchrocheck state Indicates the state of the synchrocheck func-tion.

Failed after elapse supervision time for syn-chrocheck or OK.

53 Command error Collected command error.

54 Device selected Indication, if device is selected after the selectcommand.

55 Interlock indication bypass Response to the interlock bypass command.

Indicates if bypass is possible.

56 Synchrocheck indicationbypass

Response to the Synchrocheck bypass com-mand. Indicates if bypass is possible or not.

60 External - Update blockingindication

Receives a update blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit.

61 Substitute position indica-tion

Set when the position indication in the device issubstituted.

62 External - control blockingindication

Receives a control blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit and prevents the controlactions in the single line diagram.

70 Command Select/Open/Close

Double command.

75 Interlock bypass

command

Command use for bypass the Interlock functionfor the next on/off command.

76 Synchrocheck bypass

command

Command use for bypass the synchrocheckfunction for the next on/off command.

80 External - update blockingcommand on/off

Send a update blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

82 External - control blockingcommand on/off

Send a control blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

90 Substitute position com-mand

Command to substitute the position indicationvalue.

91 Set command operationcounter total L1

Command to set the total operation counter forphase L1 to new value.

92 Set command operationcounter total L2

Command to set the total operation counter forphase L2 to new value.

Table 44: Breaker process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 197: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1931MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

93 Set command operationcounter total L3

Command to set the total operation counter forphase L3 to new value.

94 Set command operationcounter trip L1

Command to set the trip operation counter forphase L1 to new value.

95 Set command operationcounter trip L2

Command to set the trip operation counter forphase L2 to new value.

96 Set command operationcounter trip L3

Command to set the trip operation counter forphase L3 to new value.

100 Internal blocking Blocking within MicroSCADA.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows that the SwitchDevice is already selected on an other pictureor monitor.

170 Command Select/Open/Close

Command response.

175 Interlock bypass

command

Command response.

176 Synchrocheck bypass

command

Command response.

180 External - update blockingcommand on/off

Command response.

182 External - control blockingcommand on/off

Command response.

190 Substitute position com-mand

Command response.

191 Set command operationcounter total L1

Command response.

192 Set command operationcounter total L2

Command response.

193 Set command operationcounter total L3

Command response.

194 Set command operationcounter trip L1

Command response.

195 Set command operationcounter trip L2

Command response.

196 Set command operationcounter trip L3

Command response.

211 Operation counter total L1 All operations count in the device for phase L1.

212 Operation counter total L2 All operations count in the device for phase L2.

213 Operation counter total L3 All operations count in the device for phase L3.

Table 44: Breaker process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 198: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

194 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

214 Operation counter trip L1 Trip operations count in the device for phaseL1.

215 Operation counter trip L2 Trip operations count in the device for phaseL2.

216 Operation counter trip L3 Trip operations count in the device for phaseL3.

Table 45: Disconnector and earth switch process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Position indication Used for position indication of the SwitchDevice state (only representation):

- Open / - Closed / - Intermediate / - Faulty.

15 Interlocked

indication

Receives a control blocking signal for open orclose command from the control unit and pre-vents the open/close command in the singleline diagram.

16 Position error

indication

Event recording for the alarm- and event list,set if IV=1 intermediate position after elapse oftime position fail disturb position (open andclose = 1 signal).

18 Control block process External control blocking from the process.

20 Position indication Used for event recording (no influence to therepresentation)

53 Command error Collected command error

54 Device selected Indication, if device is selected after the selectcommand.

55 Interlock bypass

indication

Response to the interlocking command.

Indicates if possible or not.

60 External - update blocking

indication

Receives a update blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit 100.

61 Substitute position indica-tion

Set when the position indication in the device issubstituted.

62 External - control blockingindication

Receives a control blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit and prevents the controlactions in the single line diagram.

70 Command select/open/close

Double command.

Table 44: Breaker process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 199: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1951MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

75 Interlock bypass command Command use for the interlocking function forthe next on/off command.

80 External - update blockingCommand On/Off

Send a update blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

82 External -control blockingcommand on/off

Sends a control blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

90 Substitute position com-mand

Command to substitute the position indicationvalue.

100 Internal blocking Blocking within MicroSCADA.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows that the SwitchDevice is already selected on an other pictureor monitor.

170 Command select/open/close

Command response.

175 Interlock bypass command Command response.

180 External - update blockingCommand On/Off

Command response.

182 External -control blockingcommand on/off

Command response.

190 Substitute position com-mand

Command response.

Table 46: Truck process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Position indication Used for Position indication of the SwitchDevice state (only representation): - Open / -Closed / - Intermediate / - Faulty.

15 Interlocked indication Receives a control blocking signal for open orclose command from the control unit and pre-vents the open/close command in the singleline diagram.

16 Position error indication Event recording for the alarm- and event list,set if IV=1 intermediate position after elapse oftime position fail disturb position (open andclose = 1 signal).

18 Control block process External control blocking from the process.

20 Position indication Used for event recording (no influence to therepresentation).

Table 45: Disconnector and earth switch process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 200: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

196 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

53 Command error Collected command error.

54 Device selected Indication, if device is selected after the selectcommand.

55 Interlock bypass indication Response to the interlocking command. Indi-cates if possible or not.

60 External - update blockingindication

Receives an update blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit.

61 Substitute position indica-tion

Set when the position indication in the device issubstituted.

62 External - control blockingindication

Receives a control blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit and prevents the controlactions in the single line diagram.

70 Command select open/close

Double command.

75 Interlock bypass command Command use for the interlocking function forthe next on/off command.

80 External - update blockingCommand On/Off

Sends an update blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

82 External -control blockingCommand On/Off

Sends a control blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

90 Substitute position com-mand

Command to substitute the position indicationvalue.

100 Internal blocking Blocking within MicroSCADA.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows that the SwitchDevice is already selected on an other pictureor monitor.

170 Command select open/close

Command response.

175 Interlock bypass command Command response.

180 External - update blockingCommand On/Off

Command response.

182 External -control blockingCommand On/Off

Command response.

190 Substitute position com-mand

Command response.

Table 46: Truck process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 201: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1971MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 47: Three position switch process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Position indication Discon-nector section

Used for position indication of the Disconnectorsection state (only representation):

- Open / - Closed / -moving / - Faulty

11 Position indication Earthswitch section

Used for position indication of the Disconnectorsection state (only representation):

- Open / - Closed / -moving / - Faulty.

15 Interlocked indication Dis-connector section

Receives a control blocking signal for open orclose command from the control unit and pre-vents the open/close command in the singleline diagram.

16 Position Error

indication

Event recording for the alarm- and event list,set if IV=1 intermediate position after elapse oftime position fail disturb position (open andclose = 1 signal).

17 Interlocked indication Earthswitch section

Receives a control blocking signal for open orclose command from the control unit and pre-vents the open/close command in the singleline diagram.

18 Control block process External control blocking from the process.

20 Position indication

Disconnector section

Used for event recording (no influence to therepresentation).

21 Position indication Earthswitch section

Used for event recording (no influence to therepresentation).

53 Command Error Collected command error.

54 Device selected Indication, if device is selected after the selectcommand.

55 Interlock bypass indication Response to the interlocking command.

Indicates if possible or not.

60 External - Update blockingindication

Receives a update blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit.

61 Substitute position indica-tion

Set when the position indication in the device issubstituted.

62 External - Control blockingindication

Receives a control blocking/deblocking signalfrom the control unit and prevents the controlactions in the single line diagram.

70 Command select open/close Disconnector

section

Double command.

Page 202: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

198 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

71 Command select open/close Earth switch

section

Double command.

75 Interlock bypass command Command use for the interlocking function forthe next on/off command. This command willbe used when the on/off command works with-out qualifier.

80 External - Update blockingcommand on/off

Send a update blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

82 External - Control blockingcommand on/off

Send a control blocking/deblocking signal tothe control unit.

90 Substitute position com-mand

Command to substitute the position indicationvalue.

100 Internal blocking Blocking within MicroSCADA.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows that the SwitchDevice is already selected on an other pictureor monitor.

170 Command select open/close Disconnector

section

Command response.

171 Command select open/close Earth switch

section

Command response.

175 Interlock bypass command Command response.

180 External - Update blockingcommand on/off

Command response.

182 External - Control blockingcommand on/off

Command response.

190 Substitute position com-mand

Command response.

Table 48: Measurement process objects

Index(IX)

Description

100 Internal blocking

101 Selected on another monitor

120 Current L1

Table 47: Three position switch process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 203: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

1991MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

121 Current L2

122 Current L3

123 Neutral current I0

124 Directional neutral current

125 Maximum demand I15min

130 Phase to phase voltage L1-L2

131 Phase to phase voltage L2-L3

132 Phase to phase voltage L3-L1

133 Residual voltage U0

140 Active power P (kW)

141 Reactive power Q (kvar)

142 Apparent power S (kVA)

143 Power factor

145 Frequency f

146 Harmonic distortion

147 Temperature (Degree Celsius)

148 Phase displacement

150 Active energy (kWh)

151 Active energy (MWh)

152 Active energy (GWh)

153 Reversed active energy (kWh)

154 Reversed active energy (MWh)

155 Reversed active energy (GWh)

156 Reactive energy (kvarh)

157 Reactive energy (Mvarh)

158 Reactive energy (Gvarh)

159 Reversed react. energy (kvarh)

160 Reversed react. energy (Mvarh)

161 Reversed react. energy (Gvarh)

200 User defined measurement

201 User defined measurement

202 User defined measurement

203 User defined measurement

204 User defined measurement

205 User defined measurement

206 User defined measurement

Table 48: Measurement process objects

Index(IX)

Description

Page 204: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

200 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

207 User defined measurement

208 User defined measurement

209 User defined measurement

210 User defined pulse counter

211 User defined pulse counter

212 User defined pulse counter

213 User defined pulse counter

214 User defined pulse counter

215 User defined pulse counter

216 User defined pulse counter

217 User defined pulse counter

218 User defined pulse counter

219 User defined pulse counter

Table 49: REx 5xx supervision process objects

Device type

REC 5xx REF 5xx REx xxx OTHER

Index(IX)

Process object Folder

10 CPU01 Spare CPU Fail Spare GENERAL

11 Spare Spare CPU Warning Spare GENERAL

12 Time synchro-nization

Time synchro-nization

Internal fail Spare GENERAL

13 AFL AFL Warning Spare GENERAL

14 Spare Spare DIFF. COM Spare GENERAL

15 Spare Spare Settingchanged

Spare GENERAL

16 Spare Spare Spare Spare GENERAL

17 Spare Spare Spare Spare GENERAL

18 PSM02 Power supply Spare Spare HARDWARE

19 BIM02 1 Spare I/O BOARD 1 Spare HARDWARE

20 BIM02 2 Spare I/O BOARD 2 Spare HARDWARE

21 BIM02 3 Spare I/O BOARD 3 Spare HARDWARE

Table 48: Measurement process objects

Index(IX)

Description

Page 205: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2011MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

22 BIM02 4 Spare I/O BOARD 4 Spare HARDWARE

23 BIM02 5 Spare I/O BOARD 5 Spare HARDWARE

24 BIM02 6 Spare I/O BOARD 6 Spare HARDWARE

25 BIM02 7 Spare I/O BOARD 7 Spare HARDWARE

26 BIM02 8 Spare I/O BOARD 8 Spare HARDWARE

27 BOM01 1 Spare I/O BOARD 9 Spare HARDWARE

28 BOM01 2 Spare I/O BOARD 10 Spare HARDWARE

29 BOM01 3 Spare I/O BOARD 11 Spare HARDWARE

30 ITM01 Spare I/O BOARD 12 Spare HARDWARE

31 MTM02 1 Spare I/O BOARD 13 Spare HARDWARE

32 MTM02 2 Spare Spare Spare HARDWARE

33 AIM02 Spare Spare Spare HARDWARE

34 Spare Spare Spare Spare HARDWARE

35 Spare Spare Spare Spare HARDWARE

36 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 1 Spare VALUES

37 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 2 Spare VALUES

38 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 3 Spare VALUES

39 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 4 Spare VALUES

40 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 5 Spare VALUES

41 Spare Spare MIM BOARD 6 Spare VALUES

42 Spare Spare Spare Spare VALUES

100 Blocking Blocking Blocking Blocking BLOCK-INGS

101 Selected onanother moni-tor

Selected onanother moni-tor

Selected onanother moni-tor

Selected onanother moni-tor

BLOCK-INGS

Table 49: REx 5xx supervision process objects

Device type

REC 5xx REF 5xx REx xxx OTHER

Index(IX)

Process object Folder

Page 206: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

202 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 50: Voltage control process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Tap changer position Position of the tap changer, displayed in themain dialog box.

11 Automatic/manual mode Indication for automatic mode of the voltagecontrol.

12 Automatic/manual mode Indication for manual mode of the voltage con-trol.

15 Minimum position Indicates the minimum position of the tapchanger, after reaching this position loweringthe tap position is impossible.

16 Maximum position Indicates the maximum position of the tapchanger, after reaching this position raising thetap position is impossible.

30 Control mode Indication that the voltage control works in par-allel mode

31 Control mode Indication that the voltage control works in sin-gle mode.

32 Control mode Indication that the voltage control works in mas-ter mode. The voltage controller automaticallybecomes the master if the mode is changed tomanual mode. The others are working asslaves.

33 Control mode Indication that the voltage control works in slavemode.

34 Time characteristic mode Indication of the regulator characteristic inverse.

35 Time characteristic mode Indication of the regulator characteristic linear.

36 Tap changer block This process objects indicates, that the tapchanger is blocked.

37 Voltage control Indication for a collection of alarms build in thedevice.

50 Operating place The out of use indication is used for showing theactual state and checking the authority of thevoltage control.

51 Operating place The local indication is used for showing theactual state and checking the authority of thevoltage control.

52 Operating place The station indication is used for showing theactual state and checking the authority of thevoltage control.

53 Operating place The remote indication is used for showing theactual state and checking the authority of thevoltage control.

Page 207: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2031MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

58 Tap changer processing If the tap changer is processing from one step toanother this indication is set by the device.

60 External update blocking Indicates whether the Voltage Control indica-tions are blocked by the bay.

62 External control blocking Indicates whether the Voltage Control com-mands are blocked by the bay.

70 Position command This process object is used to send the com-mand to lower/raise the tap position as regula-tion step command to the device.

71 Automatic/manual This process object is used to set the operationmode of the voltage control to automatic ormanual.

72 Operating place This command changes the operating placefrom station to remote or remote to station.

73 Emergency OFF This command stops immediately all positioningactions on the voltage regulator.

74 Time characteristic The linear/inverse command change the char-acteristic of the algorithm in the regulator.

90 Target position This process object is used to send the com-mand to set the tap changer to a defined posi-tion.

91 Reference voltage With this command the preselected value forthe reference voltage is sent to the device(“Send new settings”). After the command “Acti-vate new settings” the preselected value is cop-ied into the reference value. All these actionsare made in the device.

92 Set value to reference volt-age

Sets the preselected value for reference voltageto the reference voltage.

100 Indication for blocking dia-log box

This indication is an internal object which isused for update blocking, blocking events, print-outs and reprocessing.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that holds the numbers ofopened dialog boxes for the same picture func-tion on different monitors.

170 Raise/lower commandresponse

Receives the response on the raise/lower com-mand.

171 Auto/manual commandresponse

Receives the response on the Automatic/man-ual command.

172 Station/remote commandresponse

Receives the response on the Station/remotecommand.

173 Emergency OFF com-mand response

Receives the response on the emergency offcommand.

Table 50: Voltage control process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 208: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

204 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

174 Linear/inverse commandresponse

Receives the response on the Linear/inversecommand.

190 Target position commandresponse

Receives the response on the target positioncommand.

191 Preselect reference com-mand response

Receives the response on the Reference volt-age command.

192 Set preselected voltagecommand response

Receives the response on the Set value to ref-erence voltage command.

200 Preselected voltage This indication is used to show the actual valueof the preselected reference voltage.

201 Reference voltage This indication is used for showing the actualvalue of the reference voltage.

202 Process voltage This indication is used for showing the actualvalue of the process voltage.

203 Step difference This indication is used for holding the actualvalue of the step difference for raising and low-ering the preselection of the reference voltage.

Table 51: Coil tap changer process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

10 Position indication Position indication of the Coil Tap Changer.Used for representation.

15 End position min Receives the end position low signal from theCoil Tap Changer.

16 End position max Receives the end position high signal from theCoil Tap Changer.

37 Alarm indication Collect generated alarms from the Coil TapChanger.

58 Processing Indicates whether the Coil Tap Changer is inoperation.

60 External update blocking Indicates whether the Coil Tap Changer indica-tion is blocked by the bay.

62 External control blocking Indicates whether the Coil Tap Changer com-mands are blocked by the bay.

70 Raise/Lower command After execution the Coil Tap Changer in stepsgoes one step down or up. The proportional tapruns lower or upper till the stop command isexecuted.

Table 50: Voltage control process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Page 209: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2051MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

6.1 Process object attributes

72 Stop command Command to stop the running Coil Tap Changerin percentage.

73 Emergency off command Emergency off command to stop both types ofCoil Tap Changers.

90 Target position command Command to set the Coil Tap Changer to theselected position.

100 Internal blocking Blocking within the MicroSCADA.

101 Selected on another moni-tor

An internal tag that shows if the Coil TapChanger is being selected in different monitors.

170 Command response forRaise/Lower command

Receives the response on the raise/lower com-mand.

172 Command response forStop command

Receives the response on the stop command.

173 Command response forEmergency off command

Receives the response on the emergency offcommand.

190 Command response forTarget position command

Receives the response on the target positioncommand.

201 Reference voltage indica-tion

Indicates the reference voltage value.

Table 51: Coil tap changer process objects

Index(IX)

Description Functionality

Table 52: Station process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Station/remote switch 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 16 EVENT REC580_? RPASTAILRS

General Interrogation 30 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 51 EVENT REC580_? RPASTAIGEV

General Interrogation 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 52 EVENT REC580_? RPASTAIGEV

Station/remote sw. to local 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 56 EVENT REC580_? RPASTACLRS

Station/remote sw. to station 71 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 56 EVENT REC580_? RPASTACLRS

Station/remote sw. to remote 72 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 56 EVENT REC580_? RPASTACLRS

Station/remote sw. to sta&rem 73 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 56 EVENT REC580_? RPASTACLRS

Station blockings 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 1 EVENT REC580_? RPASTAXBLK

Station selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 NONE REC580_? RPASTAXMEV

Station/remote sw. to local 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPASTATOBC

Station/remote sw. to station 171 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPASTATOBC

Station/remote sw. to remote 172 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPASTATOBC

Station/remote sw. to sta&rem 173 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPASTATOBC

Page 210: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

206 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 53: Bay process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Operating place 10 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 41 None REC580_? RPABAYILRS

Operating place 11 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 42 None REC580_? RPABAYILRS

Operating place 12 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 43 None REC580_? RPABAYILRS

Operating place 13 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 44 Event REC580_? RPABAYILRS

Local/remote switch 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 46 Alarm REC580_? RPABAYILRS

Local/remote switch 20 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 41 Event REC580_? RPABAYELRS

Local/remote switch 21 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 42 Event REC580_? RPABAYELRS

Local/remote switch 22 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 44 Event REC580_? RPABAYELRS

Bay connected to busbar 1 30 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 Event REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay connected to busbar 2 31 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 Event REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay connected to busbar 3 32 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 Event REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay earthed 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay status 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 48 Alarm REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay reserved 35 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPABAYIRSV

Signal block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 47 Event REC580_? RPABAYIBLK

Measurement block 61 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 47 Event REC580_? RPABAYIBLK

Control block 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 47 Event REC580_? RPABAYIBLK

Remote block 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 47 Event REC580_? RPABAYIBLK

Disturbance recorder 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 45 Event REC580_? RPABAYISCE

Auto reclosure 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 45 Event REC580_? RPABAYISCE

Auto reclosure 67 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 49 Event REC580_? RPABAYIARC

Operating place to station 72 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 58 Event REC580_? RPABAYCLRS

Operating place to remote 73 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 58 Event REC580_? RPABAYCLRS

Operating place to sta&rem 74 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 58 Event REC580_? RPABAYCLRS

Signal block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 59 Event REC580_? RPABAYCBLK

Measurement block 81 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 59 Event REC580_? RPABAYCBLK

Control block 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 59 Event REC580_? RPABAYCBLK

Remote block 83 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 59 Event REC580_? RPABAYCBLK

Disturbance recorder 85 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 60 Event REC580_? RPABAYCSCE

Auto reclosure 86 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 60 Event REC580_? RPABAYCSCE

Blockings 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPABAYXBLK

Selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPABAYXMEV

Operating place to station 172 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTLRS

Operating place to remote 173 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTLRS

Operating place to sta&rem 174 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTLRS

Signal block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTBLK

Page 211: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2071MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Measurement block 181 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTBLK

Control block 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTBLK

Remote block 183 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTBLK

Disturbance recorder 185 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTSCE

Auto reclosure 186 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPABAYTSCE

Table 53: Bay process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 54: Circuit breaker process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Breaker position ind 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 3 None REC580_? RPQS01IPOS

Breaker interlock 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01IINH

Breaker position error 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IPOS

Breaker ctrl block process 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IBLK

Breaker position 20 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 3 Event REC580_? RPQS01EPOS

Breaker auxiliary plug 30 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 31 Event REC580_? RPQS01IAUX

Breaker unctrl pos change 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01ITRP

Breaker SF6 pressure low 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IALA

Breaker drive 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker pole discrepancy 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker synchrocheck failed 36 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01ISYN

Breaker close block 37 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IBLK

Breaker cmd local 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker cmd error 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Event REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker selected 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 4 Event REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker interlock bypass 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQS01IINH

Breaker synchrocheck bypass 56 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQS01ISYN

Breaker update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01IBLK

Breaker substitute pos 61 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 35 Event REC580_? RPQS01ISUB

Breaker ctrl block operator 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01IBLK

Breaker cmd error 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker reserve error 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker operation timeout 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker cmd sequence error 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQS01IOBC

Breaker cmd 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 8 Event REC580_? RPQS01COBC

Breaker interlock bypass 75 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQS01CINH

Page 212: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

208 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Breaker synchrocheck bypass 76 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQS01CSYN

Breaker update block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQS01CBLK

Breaker ctrl block operator 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQS01CBLK

Breaker substitute pos 90 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 8 Event REC580_? RPQS01CSUB

Breaker set total counter L1 91 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker set total counter L2 92 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker set total counter L3 93 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker set trip counter L1 94 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker set trip counter L2 95 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker set trip counter L3 96 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 Event REC580_? RPQS01CCNR

Breaker internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPQS01XBLK

Breaker selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01XMEV

Breaker cmd 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TOBC

Breaker interlock bypass 175 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TINH

Breaker synchrocheck bypass 176 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TSYN

Breaker update block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TBLK

Breaker ctrl block operator 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TBLK

Breaker substitute pos 190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TSUB

Breaker set total counter L1 191 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker set total counter L2 192 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker set total counter L3 193 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker set trip counter L1 194 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker set trip counter L2 195 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker set trip counter L3 196 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQS01TCNR

Breaker total counter L1 211 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Breaker total counter L2 212 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Breaker total counter L3 213 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Breaker trip counter L1 214 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Breaker trip counter L2 215 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Breaker trip counter L3 216 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQS01MCNR

Table 54: Circuit breaker process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 55: Disconnector process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Disc. position ind 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 4 None REC580_? RPQD01IPOS

Disc. interlock 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQD01IINH

Page 213: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2091MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Disc. position error 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IPOS

Disc. ctrl block process 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IBLK

Disc. position 20 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 4 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01EPOS

Disc. unctrl pos change 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Event REC580_? RPQD01ITRP

Disc. SF6 pressure low 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IALA

Disc. drive 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. pole discrepancy 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. handcrank 35 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. cmd local 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. cmd error 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Event REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. selected 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 4 Event REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. interlock bypass 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQD01IINH

Disc. update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQD01IBLK

Disc. substitute pos 61 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 35 Event REC580_? RPQD01ISUB

Disc. ctrl block operator 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQD01IBLK

Disc. cmd error 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. reserve error 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. operation timeout 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. cmd sequence error 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQD01IOBC

Disc. cmd 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 15 Event REC580_? RPQD01COBC

Disc. interlock bypass 75 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQD01CINH

Disc. update block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQD01CBLK

Disc. ctrl block operator 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQD01CBLK

Disc. substitute pos 90 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 8 Event REC580_? RPQD01CSUB

Disc. internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPQD01XBLK

Disc. selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQD01XMEV

Disc. cmd 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQD01TOBC

Disc. interlock bypass 175 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQD01TINH

Disc. update block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQD01TBLK

Disc. ctrl block operator 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQD01TBLK

Disc. substitute pos 190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQD01TSUB

Table 55: Disconnector process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Page 214: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

210 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 56: Earth switch process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Earth Sw. position ind 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 5 None REC580_? RPQE01IPOS

Earth Sw. interlock 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQE01IINH

Earth Sw. position error 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IPOS

Earth Sw. ctrl block process 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IBLK

Earth Sw. position 20 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 5 Event REC580_? RPQE01EPOS

Earth Sw. unctrl pos change 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01ITRP

Earth Sw. SF6 pressure low 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IALA

Earth Sw. drive 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Event REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. pole discrepancy 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. cmd local 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. cmd error 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. selected 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 4 Event REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. interlock bypass 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQE01IINH

Earth Sw. update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQE01IBLK

Earth Sw. substitute pos 61 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 35 Event REC580_? RPQE01ISUB

Earth Sw. ctrl block operator 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQE01IBLK

Earth Sw. cmd error 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. reserve error 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. operation timeout 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. cmd sequence error 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQE01IOBC

Earth Sw. cmd 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 22 Event REC580_? RPQE01COBC

Earth Sw. interlock bypass 75 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQE01CINH

Earth Sw. update block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQE01CBLK

Earth Sw. ctrl block operator 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQE01CBLK

Earth Sw. substitute pos 90 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 8 Event REC580_? RPQE01CSUB

Earth Sw. internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPQE01XBLK

Earth Sw. selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQE01XMEV

Earth Sw. cmd 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQE01TOBC

Earth Sw. interlock bypass 175 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQE01TINH

Earth Sw. update block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQE01TBLK

Earth Sw. ctrl block operator 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQE01TBLK

Earth Sw. substitute pos 190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQE01TSUB

Page 215: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2111MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 57: Truck process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Truck position ind 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 6 None REC580_? RPQT01IPOS

Truck interlock 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQT01IINH

Truck position error 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IPOS

Truck ctrl block process 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IBLK

Truck position 20 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 6 Event REC580_? RPQT01EPOS

Truck unctrl pos change 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01ITRP

Truck SF6 pressure low 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IALA

Truck drive 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck pole discrepancy 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck cmd local 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck cmd error 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck selected 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 4 Event REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck interlock bypass 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQT01IINH

Truck update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQT01IBLK

Truck substitute pos 61 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 35 Event REC580_? RPQT01ISUB

Truck ctrl block operator 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQT01IBLK

Truck cmd error 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck reserve error 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck operation timeout 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck cmd sequence error 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQT01IOBC

Truck cmd 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 29 Event REC580_? RPQT01COBC

Truck interlock bypass 75 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQT01CINH

Truck update block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQT01CBLK

Truck ctrl block operator 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQT01CBLK

Truck substitute pos 90 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 8 Event REC580_? RPQT01CSUB

Truck internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPQT01XBLK

Truck selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQT01XMEV

Truck cmd 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQT01TOBC

Truck interlock bypass 175 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQT01TINH

Truck update block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQT01TBLK

Truck ctrl block operator 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQT01TBLK

Truck substitute pos 190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQT01TSUB

Page 216: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

212 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 58: Three state switch process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

3-Pos.Sw. disc. position ind 10 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 7 None REC580_? RPQ301IPOS

3-Pos.Sw. earth position ind 11 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 8 None REC580_? RPQ301IPOS

3-Pos.Sw. disc. interlock 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQ301IINH

3-Pos.Sw. position error 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IPOS

3-Pos.Sw. earth interlock 17 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQ301IINH

3-Pos.Sw. ctrl block process 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IBLK

3-Pos.Sw. disc. position 20 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 7 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301EPOS

3-Pos.Sw. earth position 21 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 8 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301EPOS

3-Pos.Sw. unctrl pos change 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301ITRP

3-Pos.Sw. SF6 pressure low 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IALA

3-Pos.Sw. drive 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. pole discrepancy 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. cmd local 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 5 Event REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. cmd error 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. selected 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 4 Event REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. interlock bypass 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 3 Event REC580_? RPQ301IINH

3-Pos.Sw. update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQ301IBLK

3-Pos.Sw. ctrl block operator 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Event REC580_? RPQ301IBLK

3-Pos.Sw. cmd error 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. reserve error 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. operation timeout 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. cmd sequence error 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 39 Alarm REC580_? RPQ301IOBC

3-Pos.Sw. disc. cmd 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 38 Event REC580_? RPQ301COBC

3-Pos.Sw. earth cmd 71 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 39 Event REC580_? RPQ301COBC

3-Pos.Sw. interlock bypass 75 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQ301CINH

3-Pos.Sw. update block 80 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQ301CBLK

3-Pos.Sw. ctrl block operator 82 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 46 Event REC580_? RPQ301CBLK

3-Pos.Sw. internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPQ301XBLK

3-Pos.Sw. selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPQ301XMEV

3-Pos.Sw. disc. cmd 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 None REC580_? RPQ301TOBC

3-Pos.Sw. earth cmd 171 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQ301TOBC

3-Pos.Sw. interlock bypass 175 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQ301TINH

3-Pos.Sw. update block 180 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQ301TBLK

3-Pos.Sw. ctrl block operator 182 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 Event REC580_? RPQ301TBLK

Page 217: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2131MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 59: Measurement process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Blockings 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 Event REC580_? RPPMEAXBLK

Selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 None REC580_? RPPMEAXMEV

Current L1 120 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMCUR

Current L2 121 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMCUR

Current L3 122 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMCUR

Neutral current I0 123 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMNCU

Directional neutral current Ij 124 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMDNC

Maximum demand I15min 125 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMMDC

Voltage U12 130 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMVOL

Voltage U23 131 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMVOL

Voltage U31 132 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMVOL

Residual voltage U0 133 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMRVL

Active power P (kW) 140 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAPW

Reactive power Q (kvar) 141 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMRPW

Apparent power S (kVA) 142 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAPP

Power factor Cos phi 143 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMCOS

Frequency f 145 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMFRQ

Harmonic distortion 146 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMHDS

Temperature (Degree Cel-cius)

147 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMTMP

Phase displacement(Degree)

148 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMPHD

Active energy (kWh) 150 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Active energy (MWh) 151 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Active energy (GWh) 152 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Reversed active energy(kWh)

153 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Reversed active energy(MWh)

154 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Reversed active energy(GWh)

155 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMAEN

Reactive energy (kvarh) 156 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

Reactive energy (Mvarh) 157 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

Reactive energy (Gvarh) 158 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

Reversed react. energy(kvarh)

159 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

Reversed react. energy(Mvarh)

160 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

Page 218: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

214 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Reversed react. energy(Gvarh)

161 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMREN

User defined measurement 200 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 201 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 202 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 203 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 204 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 205 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 206 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 207 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 208 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined measurement 209 AI X6 FORM4RAI2 1 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 210 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 211 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 212 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 213 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 214 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 215 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 216 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 217 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 218 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

User defined pulse counter 219 PC X8 0 Alarm REC580_? RPPMEAMXXX

Table 59: Measurement process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 60: REx 5xx supervision process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

CPU fail 10 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 11 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Time synchronisation 12 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 46 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

AFL warning 13 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 14 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 17 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Power supply module 02 18 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/1 19 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Page 219: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2151MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

BI module 02/2 20 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/3 21 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/4 22 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/5 23 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/6 24 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/7 25 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BI module 02/8 26 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BO module 01/1 27 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BO module 01/2 28 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

BO module 01/3 29 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

IT module 01 30 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

MT module 02/1 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

MT module 02/2 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

AI module 02 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 35 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 36 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 37 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 38 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 39 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 40 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 41 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Spare 42 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 79 ALARM REC580_? RPWMFUITES

Supervision internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 1 EVENT REC580_? RPWMFUXBLK

Selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 NONE REC580_? RPWMFUXMEV

Table 60: REx 5xx supervision process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 61: Voltage control process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Tap changer position 10 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Automatic/manual mode 11 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 53 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIMAN

Automatic/manual mode 12 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 54 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIMAN

Minimum position 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 50 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Maximum position 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 50 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Control mode 30 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 56 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRISGL

Page 220: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

216 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Control mode 31 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 57 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRISGL

Control mode 32 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 58 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIMST

Control mode 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 59 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIMST

Time characteristic mode 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 60 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRISBK

Time characteristic mode 35 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 61 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRISBK

Tap changer block 36 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 62 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIBLK

Voltage control 37 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 63 ALARM REC580_? RPTAVRIALA

Voltage control block 39 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 62 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Positive deviation 40 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 73 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Negative deviation 42 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 73 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Fast step down mode 43 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 73 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Operating place 50 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 64 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRILRS

Operating place 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 65 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRILRS

Operating place 52 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 66 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRILRS

Operating place 53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 67 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRILRS

Automatic/manual cmd loc. 54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 69 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Automatic/manual cmd rem. 55 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 69 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Position cmd local 56 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 70 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Position cmd remote 57 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 70 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Tap changer processing 58 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 68 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOPR

Set value to ref volt cmd loc. 59 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 71 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 50 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIBLK

Control block 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 50 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIBLK

Set value to ref volt cmd rem. 63 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 71 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Tap changer position 64 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 63 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Reference voltage cmd loc. 65 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 71 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Reference voltage cmd rem. 66 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 71 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Time characteristic cmd loc. 67 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 72 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Time characteristic cmd rem. 68 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 72 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIXXX

Position command 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 61 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCPOS

Automatic/manual 71 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 62 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCMAN

Operating place 72 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 63 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCLRS

Emergency OFF 73 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 64 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCINR

Time characteristic 74 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 65 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCSBK

Target position 90 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRSPOS

Reference voltage 91 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRSRVO

Set value to reference voltage 92 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 64 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCRVO

Table 61: Voltage control process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Page 221: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2171MRK 511 064-UEN

Process objects reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Blockings 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRXBLK

Selected on monitor 101 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRXMEV

Raise/lower cmd resp 170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTPOS

Auto/manual cmd resp 171 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTMAN

Station/remote cmd resp 172 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTLRS

Emergency off cmd resp 173 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTINR

Linear/inverse cmd resp 174 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTSBK

Target position cmd resp 190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTPOS

Presel. reference cmd resp 191 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTRVO

Set presel. voltage cmd resp 192 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTRVO

Preselected voltage 200 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRMRVO

Reference voltage 201 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRMRVO

Process voltage 202 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRMVOL

Step difference 203 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 1 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRMVOL

Transformer routing prim. info 249 BI 3 0 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRXPOS

Transformer fict. pos. ind. 253 BI 3 0 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRXPOS

Transformer predefined color 255 AI 9 0 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRXPCD

Table 61: Voltage control process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 62: Coil tap changer process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Position 10 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 0 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Minimum position 15 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 74 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Maximum position 16 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 74 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIPOS

Process 37 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 75 ALARM REC580_? RPTAVRIALA

Raise/lower cmd remote 51 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 77 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOBC

Stop cmd remote 52 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 78 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOBC

Emergency off cmdremote

53 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 78 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOBC

Target position cmdremote

54 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 78 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOBC

Processing 58 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 76 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIOPR

Update block 60 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 74 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIBLK

Control block 62 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 74 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRIBLK

Raise/lower 70 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 66 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCPOS

Stop 72 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 67 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCPOS

Page 222: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

218 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

7 Information message reference

Information messages are displayed in the dialog box info bar. Some messages arecommon for all library functions and some specific for each function. The followingtables contains the available messages. Information messages text files are listed in“Dialog box labels and messages” on page 180.

Emergency off 73 BO X1 FORM4RBO1 67 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCINR

Target position 90 BS X14 FORM4RBS1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRCPOS

Internal blocking 100 AI X6 FORM4RAI1 2 EVENT REC580_? RPTAVRXBLK

Selected on monitor 101 AI X6 0 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRXMEV

Cmd response raise/lower

170 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTPOS

Cmd response stop 172 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTPOS

Cmd response emer-gency off

173 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTINR

Cmd response targetposition

190 AI X6E FORM4RAI1 10 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRTPOS

Reference voltage 201 AI X6 FORM4RAI3 0 NONE REC580_? RPTAVRMRVO

Table 62: Coil tap changer process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Table 63: Bay overview process object attributes

OX IX PT DX PF RI E/A/N RX

Bay connected to busbar 1 30 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay connected to busbar 2 31 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay connected to busbar 3 32 DB X7D FORM4RDB1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay earthed 33 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 0 EVENT REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Bay status 34 BI X7S FORM4RBI1 48 ALARM REC580_? RPABAYIPOS

Table 64: Common messages

Message Meaning

Bay in local use only The local/remote switch in the control unit is inlocal state.

Page 223: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2191MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Bay in remote use only The local/remote switch in the control unit is inremote state.

Control disabled within bay The local/remote switch in the control unit is indisabled state.

Bay local/remote switch inhibits con-trol

Bay local/remote switch is either in local orremote or off position.

Station/remote switch inhibits control Station local/remote switch is either in local,remote or off position.

Control blocked by control device The control is blocked by the control unit.

Update blocked by control device The update is blocked by the control unit.

Discrepancy in control objects All control process objects in the database hasnot the same position indication state.

Discrepancy in position indicationobjects

All process objects in the database are not inthe same switch state.

Command not connected to theprocess

One of command process objects not set inauto mode or unit number not defined.

Indication not connected to process One of indication process objects not set inauto mode or unit number not defined.

Not authorized control center The control authority for the station is not givenfor this application.

Not authorized to control The personal authority level of the user is notsufficient.

Waiting for indication change, pleasewait!

Waiting for the answer from the terminal aftercommand selection.

Operating, please wait! Command in execution process.

Operation failed! Operation not executed.

Status code: XXX NAC code XXX returned from the Frontend.

Process data poll started! General interrogation started after setting sub-stitute value or update block to off or aftersending the database update command.

Selected on another monitor The same object has been selected and thecontrol dialog box is open on another monitor.

The control dialog box time-out hasexpired

The dialog box has been closed because oftime-out expiration. This message is shown onthe info bar of the station picture.

Values substituted by control device Process object “substitute position” in controldevice set to 1.

Substitution, please wait! Process of setting substitute value to the proc-ess objects in the database in progress.

Object missing index nn Process object nn not in use in the database

Table 64: Common messages

Message Meaning

Page 224: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

220 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

7.1 Library function specific messages

Bay local/remoteswitch...

...missing Switch command execution status.

...not sampled

...notsynchronized

...invalid

...not updated

...blocked

...substituted

...notconnected

...negative activation

...activation time-out

...termination time-out

...negative termina-tion

Station/remoteswitch...

...missing Switch command execution status.

...not sampled

...notsynchronized

...invalid

...not updated

...blocked

...substituted

...notconnected

...negative activation

...activation time-out

...termination time-out

...negative termina-tion

Table 64: Common messages

Message Meaning

Table 65: Bay

Message Bay local/remote switch has irrational value

Page 225: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2211MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Identification MSG_BAY_LR_VALUE_ERROR

Condition -

Message Bay local/remote switch is off

Identification MSG_BAY_IN_OFF

Condition -

Message Measurement blocked by control device

Identification MSG_MEAS_BLK

Condition -

Table 66: Switch device

Message Auto-reclosing in progress

Identification MSG_AR_RUNNING

Condition BAY_OPPL_REQUIRED AND MOTORIZED AND

AR_INUSE_FOUND AND AR_RUNNING_FOUND AND

(‘LN’:POS’AR_INUSE_IX’ = 0 ) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’AR_INUSE_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’AR_INUSE_IX’ = 1) AND

(‘LN’:POS’AR_RUNNING_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’AR_RUNNING_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’AR_RUNNING_IX’ > 0)

Message Bay reserve (+missing)

Identification MSG_EXT_BAYRES

Condition BAY_OPPL_REQUIRED AND MOTORIZED AND

NOT( EXT_BAYRES_FOUND)

Message Blocked by process

Identification MSG_BLOCKED

Condition MOTORIZED AND DEV_BLOCK_FOUND AND

(‘LN’:POS’DEV_BLOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DEV_BLOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DEV_BLOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’ DEV_BLOCK_IX’=1)

Message Canceling device reservation, please wait!

Identification MSG_CANCELING

Condition (KEY_CANCEL=PRESSED) AND (SELECTED_STATE=2)

Message Close interlocked by control device

Identification MSG_CLOSE_INTERLOCKED

Table 65: Bay

Page 226: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

222 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Condition MOTORIZED AND (Switch Type = "Q3" ) AND

DISC_ILOCK_FOUND AND EARTH_ILOCK_FOUND AND

(TPS_SECTION = 3) AND (‘LN’:POS’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DISC_ILOCK_IX’=1)

Message Device is not selected

Identification MSG_DEV_NOT_SELECTED

Condition MOTORIZED AND (COMMAND_STATE <> 0) AND

DEV_SELECT_FOUND AND

(‘LN’:POS’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0 ) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 1)

Message Database has no link to the process

Identification MSG_NO_LINK_TO_PROCESS

Condition (OLD_MODE_VALUE = 1) AND SIMULATION_ONLY AND

(USER_AUTH_LEVEL > 0)

Message Device is selected

Identification MSG_DEV_SELECTED

Condition MOTORIZED AND (COMMAND_STATE <> 0) AND

DEV_SELECT_FOUND AND (‘LN’:POS’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0)

Message Device not controllable

Identification MSG_DEV_NOT_CONTROLLABLE

Condition NOT MOTORIZED

Message Disconnected

Identification MSG_DISCONNECTED

Condition AUX_PLUG_REQUIRED AND AUX_PLUG_FOUND AND

NOT AUX_PLUG_OPEN AND (‘LN’:POS’AUX_PLUG_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’AUX_PLUG_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’AUX_PLUG_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’AUX_PLUG_IX’ = 0)

Message Earth interlocked by control device

Identification MSG_EARTH_INTERLOCKED

Table 66: Switch device

Page 227: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2231MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Condition MOTORIZED AND (Switch Type = "Q3") AND

DISC_ILOCK_FOUND AND EARTH_ILOCK_FOUND AND

(TPS_SECTION = 3) AND (‘LN’:POS’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ =0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’=1)

Message Interlocked by control device

Identification MSG_INTERLOCKED

Table 66: Switch device

Page 228: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

224 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Condition MOTORIZED AND

(

(

(Switch Type <> "Q3”) AND EXEC_ILOCK_FOUND AND

(‘LN’:POS’EXEC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’EXEC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’EXEC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’EXEC_ILOCK_IX’=1)

)

OR

(

(Switch Type = "Q3") AND DISC_ILOCK_FOUND AND

EARTH_ILOCK_FOUND AND (TPS_SECTION = 1) AND

(‘LN’:POS’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 1)

)

OR

(

(Switch Type = "Q3") AND DISC_ILOCK_FOUND AND

EARTH_ILOCK_FOUND AND (TPS_SECTION = 5) AND

(‘LN’:POS’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0 ) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 1)

)

OR

(

(Switch Type = "Q3") AND EARTH_ILOCK_FOUND AND

ON EVENT ‘LN’:E’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ AND

(COMMAND_STATE = 2) AND

(‘LN’:POV’EARTH_ILOCK_IX’ = 1)

)

OR

(

(Switch Type = "Q3) AND DISC_ILOCK_FOUND AND

ON EVENT ‘LN’:E’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ AND

(COMMAND_STATE = 2) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DISC_ILOCK_IX’ = 1)

)

)

Message Not authorized to change the mode

Table 66: Switch device

Page 229: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2251MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Identification MSG_UNAUTH_TO_CHANGE_MODE

Condition -

Message Not authorized to simulate

Identification MSG_UNAUTH_TO_SIMULATE

Condition -

Message Occupied, device is selected

Identification MSG_UNDER_COMMAND

Condition MOTORIZED AND (COMMAND_STATE = 0) AND

DEV_SELECT_FOUND AND

(‘LN’:POS’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PBL’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:PUB’DEV_SELECT_IX’ = 0) AND

(‘LN’:POV’DEV_SELECT_IX ’= 1)

Message Operation disabled by an command error

Identification MSG_CMD_ERROR

Condition MOTORIZED AND CMD_ERROR_FOUND AND

ON EVENT ‘LN’:E’CMD_ERROR_IX’ AND

(COMMAND_STATE > 0) AND (‘LN’:POV’CMD_ERROR_IX’ =1 )

Message Reserving device, please wait!

Identification MSG_SELECTING

Condition (“KEY_CLOSE” PRESSED) AND

(FORCED_OPERATION OR CLOSE_SENSITIVE)

AND

((OPEN_DIALOG = FORCED_OPERATION_DIALOG) OR

(KEY_OPEN = PRESSED) AND (FORCED_OPERATION OR

CLOSE_SENSITIVE) AND

(OPEN_DIALOG = FORCED_OPERATION_DIALOG)

Message Simulation process data poll started!

Identification MSG_SIM_UPDATE_STARTED

Condition EXT_BLK_REQUIRED AND ((‘LN’:PUB’SIMULATE_IX’ = 1) OR

(‘LN’:PBL’SIMULATE_IX’ = 1) OR UPDATE_BLOCKED)

Message Simulation update blocked

Identification MSG_SIM_UPDATE_BLK

Condition (KEY_OK = PRESSED) AND

(NEW_MODE_VALUE = OLD_MODE_VALUE) AND

(NEW_MODE_VALUE = 2)

Table 66: Switch device

Page 230: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

226 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Table 67: Measurement

Message Meaning

Warning limit exceeded Measurement value exceeds the high or low warninglimit.

Measurement alarming (unac-knowledged)

Measurement value is alarming and it can beacknowledged with the "Alarm state” dialog or in thealarm list.

Measurement alarming(acknowledged)

Measurement value is alarming and it has alreadybeen acknowledged.

Measurement value overflow Measurement or pulse counter value out of range.

Table 68: Voltage control

Message Operating please wait!

Identification MSG_OPERATING

Condition Command is sent to the device

Message Operation failed, status code:

Identification MSG_ERROR

Condition -

Message Operation failed, status: negative activation confir-mation

Identification MSG_ERROR_1

Condition -

Message Operation failed, status: activation timeout

Identification MSG_ERROR_2

Condition -

Message Operation failed, status: termination timeout

Identification MSG_ERROR_3

Condition -

Message Operation failed, status: negative termination confir-mation

Identification MSG_ERROR_4

Condition -

Message Automatic mode inhibit control

Identification MSG_IND_AUTO

Condition (The tap changer automatic indication OV = 1) AND

(OS <> 10)

Page 231: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2271MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Message Tap changer blocked

Identification MSG_IND_BLOCKED

Condition (The tap changer blocked indication OV = 1) AND

(OS <> 10)

Message Voltage control alarming

Identification MSG_IND_ALARM

Condition (An indication with alarmclass > 0) AND

(Alarmgeneration is set)

Message Tap changer in maximum position

Identification MSG_IND_ENDPOS_MAX

Condition (Tap changer end pos. max. indication OV = 1) AND

(OS <> 10)

Message Tap changer in minimum position

Identification MSG_IND_ENDPOS_MIN

Condition (Tap changer end pos. min. indication OV = 1) AND

(OS <> 10)

Message Commands are blocked or faulty indication

Identification MSG_CMD_BLOCKED

Condition (Indication for commands are blocked has OV = 1) OR

(BL attribute set)

Message Voltage contr. local/remote-switch

Identification MSG_TRA_OPPL

Condition -

Message Voltage control local/remote switch inhibits control

Identification MSG_TRA_OPPL_INHIBITS

Condition SR switch is not in station or station/remote

Message Selected on another monitor

Identification MSG_SELECTED_ON_MONITOR

Condition ’LN’:POV101 > 1

Message The control dialog box timeout has expired

Identification MSG_DIALOG_TIMEOUT

Condition No action at the last 60 seconds

Message Tap changer is processing

Identification MSG_IND_PROCESSING

Table 68: Voltage control

Page 232: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

228 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Information message reference

Application engineering information

Appendix

Condition (Processing indication has OV = 1) AND (OS <> 10)

Message ACR 1

ACR 2

ACR 3

ACR 4

ACR 5

ACR 6

ACR 7

ACR 8

ACR 9

ACR 10

Identification MSG_ACR_INFO1

MSG_ACR_INFO2

MSG_ACR_INFO3

MSG_ACR_INFO4

MSG_ACR_INFO5

MSG_ACR_INFO6

MSG_ACR_INFO7

MSG_ACR_INFO8

MSG_ACR_INFO9

MSG_ACR_INFO10

Condition -

Table 69: Coil tap changer

Message Lower the tap position

Identification EXEC_TEXT1

Condition -

Message Raise the tap position

Identification EXEC_TEXT2

Condition -

Message Coil goes to positiona

Identification EXEC_TEXT3

Condition -

Message End position min!

Identification MSG_TAP_END_POX_MIN

Table 68: Voltage control

Page 233: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2291MRK 511 064-UEN

Miscellaneous

Application engineering information

Appendix

a) Displayed in the control confirmation dialog box

8 Miscellaneous

8.1 Scale object

8.2 Event channel

Event Channels not used by default.

Condition ‘LN’:POV15 = 1

Message End position max!

Identification MSG_TAP_END_POS_MAX

Condition ‘LN’:POV16 = 1

Message Object is alarming

Identification MSG_ALARMING

Condition ‘LN’:POV37 = 1

Message Tap changer position lowering

Identification MSG_TAP_POS_LOWERING

Condition After lower command

Message Tap changer position raising

Identification MSG_TAP_POS_RAISING

Condition After raise command

Message Tap changer stopping

Identification MSG_TAP_STOPPING

Condition After stop command

Message Tap changer emergency off

Identification MSG_TAP_EMERGENCY_OFF

Condition After emergency off command

Table 69: Coil tap changer

Table 70: Scale objects

Scale Object Description

1_1 Linear 1:1 scale created by all functions during process of thefunction installation if not existed previously.

1000_NOMINAL_VOLTAGE

Linear scale, created by Voltage control function.

Page 234: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

230 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Miscellaneous

Application engineering information

Appendix

Page 235: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

231

Reference publications

The following documents are related to this manual and the operation of the LIB 580functions.

Protection terminals

REC 580*3.0 Technical reference manual, 1MRK 511 059-UEN

S.P.I.D.E.R. Manuals, MicroSCADA rev 8.4.2

User’s ManualProgramming language SCILObject Description

References

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 236: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

232 1MRK 511 064-UEN

References

Page 237: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

233

Symbols/ 13\ 13

Aabbreviations 5acknowledged alarms 117acronyms 5alarm

acknowledge 42alarm list 42state 41

alarm blocking 43alarm indicator

status indication 149alarm limit 102, 104alarms 117angle

clock 110value 110

application setting 49automatic reclosing function 67autorecloser 67

Bbay

automatic reclosing function 67blocking 42, 66disturbance 68event recording 63events 69functionality 57installation options 58presentation 63process objects 59station/remote switch 64status indication 63

Bay Control dialog box 64bay overview

functionality 143presentation 146process objects 145status indication 146

binary input modules 115blocking

alarm 43control 43event 43printout 43reprocessing 43update 43

Blocking tab 115busbar 143bypass interlocking 89

Ccheck boxes 54, 65Close button 36close device 83coil tap changer

emergency 140fixed percentage position 142functionality 133installation 134per cent 139position 141process objects 137raise/lower 140steps 139

colorbusbar 143coding 33measured values 98process objects 34trend window 105, 106

commands 5unavailable 6, 37

common menu commands 40control 119

authority 49blocking 43characteristic 129

Control confirmation dialog box 38conventions 7

buttons 7code samples 7color 33configuration attributes 7dialog boxes 7file names 7naming 33tabs 7

counting operations 85cubicle 84

Ddeadband 102definitions 5delimiter

MicroSCADA 13Windows 13

deviceclose 83open 83

device type 117dialog box

Close button 36closing 37common menu commands 40control confirmation 38function specific contents 36Help button 36info bar 36, 45main dialog box 35monitor interlocking 41More button 36, 40, 41multiple display 41not movable 45object identifier 35, 36preselection 37setting closing options 24title bar 35

Index

1MRK 511 064-UEN

Page 238: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

234 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Index

dimmed 37discarding samples 105disk space 11displacement 109disturbance recorder 68

Eemergency 127, 140event blocking 43event list 69event recording 63external blocking 66, 88

Ffrozen value 100function instance

definition 34exceptions 18obscuring 121, 135size 18, 72, 94, 109, 112, 120, 134, 144, 147

Ggeneral interrogation 53, 56General tab 115

HHardware tab 115Help button 36

Iinfo bar 36

See also dialog boxinitializing the substation 55input signals 147installation

LIB 580 12MicroSCADA 12

interlocking bypass 89Internal 44interrogating 53, 56inverse time 129invisible installation 48IT 18

LLAG 1.3 15limits 102linear time 129listing events 69logical path names

B_USE 13R_INST 13R_LANG 13R_USE 13

LON 11

Mmanual/automatic 127master/slave 126maximum value 99measurement

alarm limit 102, 104chart display 103deadband 102display 99, 100freezing 100function status 98functionality 93limits 102momentary 100number of samples 105presentation 98process objects 97threshold 102trend

expanding 104sampling interval 105

trend window 103unit display 100warning limit 102, 104

Measurement dialog box 99menu commands 40message

active object 45error 45warning 45

MicroLIBRARY 11MicroNET 11MicroSCADA notification window 56MicroSYS 11MicroTOOL 11milliampere input modules 115minimum value 99monitor 119, 147monitoring 111More button 36

Oobject identifier

defining 15display setting 25SYS_BASCON.COM 14, 15, 35

object name 114OI attribute 35, 44

See also object identifieropen 83operating system 11operations 85operator place 39OPOT 22Optional process object tool 22OX attribute 45

PPCNet 11per cent 139percentage position 142

Page 239: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2351MRK 511 064-UEN

Index

phase angle 110phase displacement

functionality 109plug 84position indication

process database only 91substitute 90

POT 20preselection dialog box 37present value 99printout blocking 43Process control dialog box 24Process object tool 20pulse counter measurement 101

Rreadme file 13, 14recording disturbances 68reference voltage 131release 117Representation tool 21reprocessing 43requirements 11REx 5xx supervision

functionality 111installation 111object name 114presentation 114process objects 114signal state 114status indication 114, 117

RT 21

Ssampling 106

fast 107interval 105step 106

SCT 19set point 131setting limits 102signal state 114signal status 147simulated process 127, 131, 132simulation 130single/parallel 126SPA 11Standard configuration tool 19state

forcing 88interlocking bypass 89synchrocheck bypass 89

state changescounting 85

stationblocking 42functionality 47installation

invisible 48options 49visible 48

limitations 49presentation 53process objects 50station authority 49station/remote switch 54status indication 53

Station Control dialog box 53station type 15station/remote switch 54, 64status 115steps 139Substation Control System 49supervision 111supervision status 115switch device

blocking 88close 83counting operations 85functionality 71open 83operation counting

setting start values 87process objects 79state control 88supported devices 71symbol size 72

symbol 18See also function instance

synchrocheck bypass 89system restart 55

Ttab 6tap changer 127, 132

See also transformer voltage controltap position 141terminal

status 111supervision 111

terminal blocking 115terminal data 117threshold 102time

inverse 129linear 129

title bar 35See also dialog box 35

transformer 119coil tap position 140operation mode 126output voltage 127, 131, 140reference voltage 127tap position 127

transformer voltage controlalarm limits 127control characteristic

inverse time 129linear time 129

emergency 127functionality 119installation 120manual/automatic 127

Page 240: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

236 1MRK 511 064-UEN

Index

measurement instance size 121process objects 123simulation 130station/remote 127tap changer

position 132raise/lower 127

warning limits 127trends

displaying 103truck 84

auxiliary plug 84type function

definition 34

Uunacknowledged alarm 117unavailable commands 6, 37unit display 100update blocking 43user event

creation on command execution 24, 37enabling 24

Vvalues

alarm limit 104, 127display 99display setting 25frozen 100maximum 99minimum 99monitoring 93present 99warning limit 104

Values tab 115verify database 55version 117view 147visible installation 48Voltage control dialog box 126voltage control simulation 130voltage control. See transformer voltage controlvoltage reference 131

Wwarning limit 102, 104, 127

Zzero deadband 102

Page 241: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

Product:

ABB Automation Products AB would appreciate your comments on this product.Please grade the following questions by selecting one alternative per category. Youranswer will enables us to improve our products.

How do you grade the quality of the product?

Excellent Poor

Total impression

Useability

Functionality

Human-machine interface

Comments: __________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

How do you grade the quality of the documentation?

Excellent Poor

Total impression

Layout

Illustrations

Readability

Easy to find

Content structure

Comments: __________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

Customer feedback report

Rem

ove

from

bind

er

Page 242: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

2

Suggestions for improvements:

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Please send this report to:

ABB Automation Products ABSubstation Automation DivisionDept. TMD4SE-721 59 Västerås

By fax:Send to +46 (0) 21 32 16 33

Rem

ove

from

bind

er

Page 243: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

Program:

This card registers your program and makes you eligible to receive information aboutfuture updates.

Name:

_____________________________________________________________________________________Title:

____________________________________________________________________________________Company: Dept.

____________________________________________________________________________________Address:

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________City: State: Zip:

____________________________________________________________________________________Phone:

____________________________________________________________________________________Fax:

____________________________________________________________________________________

Program supplied by:

____________________________________________________________________________________Adress:

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________City: State: Zip:

____________________________________________________________________________________Phone:

____________________________________________________________________________________Date of receival of the program:

____________________________________________________________________________________Program serial Nr:

____________________________________________________________________________________

Fax:

Please send this registration card to ABB Automation Products AB Sweden, department TPS+46 (0) 21 32 17 36

Software Registration FormR

emov

efr

ombi

nder

Page 244: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

PlacePostageStampHere

ABB Automation Products ABSubstation Automation DivisionDepartment: TPSSE-721 59 VästeråsSweden

To be folded

Tape here

Rem

ove

from

bind

er

Page 245: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

ABB Automation Products AB

License Agreement

This legal document is an agreement between You, the user, and ABB Automation Products AB, Västerås, SWEDEN. By openingthe diskette package You indicate your acceptance of the terms and conditions of this agreement. If You do not agree to the terms ofthis agreement, promptly return the unopened diskette package and other items which are part of the product for a full refund. Yourproduct is a single user version unless you have a written agreement with ABB Automation Products AB.

1. Grant of License • This ABB Automation Products AB License Agreement (”License”) grants you the nonexclusive right to useone copy of the enclosed software program (”SOFTWARE”) on a single computer (i.e., with a single CPU) at asingle location at any time. If you have multiple Licenses for the SOFTWARE you may have as many copies ofthe SOFTWARE in use as you have Licenses.

2. Copyright • The software is owned by ABB Automation Products AB or its suppliers and is protected by Swedish copyrightlaws, international treaty provisions, and all other applicable national laws. Therefore you must treat the SOFT-WARE as any other copyrighted material (e.g., a book or musical recording) except that if the software is notcopy protected you may either (a) make a copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes, or (b)transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival pur-poses. You may not copy the Documentation accompanying the SOFTWARE.

3. Term • The License is effective until terminated. This License will terminate automatically without notice from ABBAutomation Products AB if you fail to comply with any provision of this License. Upon termination you shallreturn the diskettes containing the SOFTWARE and all Documentation to ABB Automation Products AB anddestroy any copies of the SOFTWARE or any portions of it which has not been returned to ABB AutomationProducts AB, including copies resident in computer memory.

4. Other Restrictions • You may not rent, lease, lend, sell or give away the SOFTWARE, but you may transfer your rights under thisABB Automation Products AB License Agreement on a permanent basis provided you transfer all copies of theSOFTWARE and all written materials, and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. You may notmodify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or create derivative works based on theSOFTWARE. You may not modify, adapt, translate or create derivative works based on the written materials.

Limited Warranty • ABB Automation Products AB warrants that the software will perform substantially in accordance with theaccompanying Product Manual(s) for a period of 1 year from the date of delivery from ABB Automation Prod-ucts AB, Västerås. ABB Automation Products AB does not warrant that the SOFTWARE is free from codingerrors.

Customer Remedies • ABB Automation Products AB’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at ABB Automation Prod-ucts AB’s option, either (a) return of the price paid or (b) repair or replacement of the SOFTWARE that does notmeet ABB Automation Products AB’s Limited Warranty and which is returned to ABB Automation ProductsAB with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted fromaccident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement SOFTWARE will be warranted for the remainder of theoriginal warranty period or 30 days, whichever is longer.

No Other Warranties • ABB Automation Products AB disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not lim-ited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the SOFT-WARE, accompanying Product Manual(s) and written materials. This warranty gives you specific legal rights.

No Liability for Conse-quential Damages

• Neither ABB Automation Products AB nor anyone else who has been involved in the creation, production ordelivery of this product shall be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental damages (includingdamages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like) arising outof the use or inability to use such product even if ABB Automation Products AB has been advised of the possi-bility of such damages. In any case, ABB Automation Products AB’s entire liability under any provision of thisagreement shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the software.

By opening the diskette package you acknowledge that you have read this agreement, understand it, and agree tobe bound by its terms and conditions. You also agree that it is the complete and exclusive statement of the agree-ment between the parties and supersedes all proposals or prior agreement, oral or written, and any other commu-nications between the parties relating to the subject matter of the licence or limited warranty.

This Agreement is governed in all aspects by Swedish law. If any provisions of this Agreement are invalid orunenforceable, all others will remain in effect.

IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING

SOFTWARE LICENSE

LIMITED WARRANTY

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

Page 246: User’s Manual LIB 580*4.0.2 MS-Process*1 · 2018. 5. 9. · 1 This is a user’s manual for LIB 580 Document number: 1MRK 511 064-UEN Version: 4.0.2 Revision: 00 Issue date: June

ABB Automation Products ABSubstation Automation DivisionSE-721 59 VästeråsSwedenTel: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00Fax: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18www.abb.se/apr

1MR

K51

106

4-U

EN

Printed on recycled and ecolabelled paper